Download Xedio CleanEdit User`s Manual

User’s Manual
Version 4.1 - December 2011
From Xedio Suite
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
C OPYRIGHT
EVS Br oadca st E quip men t – Co pyri ght © 20 10-2 01 1. Al l ri ghts res erved .
D ISCLAIMER
The inf ormat ion in this m anual i s furn ishe d for i nf ormati onal u se onl y and subjec t
to chang e witho ut not ice . While eve ry eff ort has been made to en sure t hat th e
inform atio n cont aine d in this use r manua l is ac curate , up- to-da te an d r eliab le,
EVS Broad cast E quipm e nt canno t be hel d respo nsible f or ina ccur acie s or errors
that m ay a ppea r in th is p ublica tio n.
I MPROVEMENT R EQUESTS
Your comme nts wil l help us improv e the qua lity o f the user doc ument atio n. Do not
hesit ate to se nd i mprov e ment r eque sts, or r epor t any e rror or i nacc urac y on th is
user m anua l by e-ma il to doc@ev s.tv .
R EGIONAL C ONTACTS
You will fin d the ful l list of addres ses and ph one number s of local of fice s eithe r at
the e nd of this us er m a nual (for man uals on ha rdware pro duct s) or o n t he EV S
websit e on the fo llowi ng page: htt p:// www.e vs.t v/c ontac ts
U SER M ANUALS ON EVS W EBSITE
The la tes t ver sion of th e user man ual, if any , and o ther user man uals on EV S
produc ts can be f ound o n the EVS down load c e nter, on t he fol lowin g webpage :
http: //www .evs .tv/ downl o adcent er
I
Issue 4.1.B
II
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................................................................. III
ABOUT THIS MANUAL.................................................................................................. IX
WHAT’S NEW ON CLEANEDIT V3.02 AND V4.01?...................................................... XI
1.
INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION...........................................................................................................1
1.2 MAIN WINDOW ...........................................................................................................................1
1.2.1 Area Name .............................................................................................................................2
1.3 ZONES IN THE PROJECT AREA ................................................................................................3
1.4 TABS IN THE WORK AREA ........................................................................................................4
1.4.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................4
1.4.2 Selecting a Tab in the Work Area............................................................................................4
2.
THE BASICS .......................................................................................................... 5
2.1 INTRODUCTION ..........................................................................................................................5
2.2 STARTING CLEANEDIT ..............................................................................................................5
2.3 OPENING A NEW PROJECT ......................................................................................................6
2.3.1 Initial Window Display .............................................................................................................6
2.3.2 Project Definition .....................................................................................................................6
2.3.3 How to Create a New Project ..................................................................................................6
2.4 FINDING MEDIA FOR THE PROJECT ........................................................................................7
2.4.1 Making Media Available in Xedio CleanEdit ............................................................................7
2.4.2 Where to Find Media in Xedio CleanEdit ................................................................................7
2.4.3 Viewing Media Before Adding it to the Project ........................................................................9
2.5 CREATING AN EDIT..................................................................................................................10
2.6 ADDING MEDIA TO THE PROJECT .........................................................................................11
2.7 REFINING MEDIA INTO CLIPS .................................................................................................12
2.8 PLACING CLIPS ONTO THE TIMELINE ...................................................................................14
2.8.1 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................14
2.8.2 Marking Position on the Timeline ..........................................................................................15
2.8.3 Mode to Place the Clip onto the Timeline..............................................................................15
2.9 CHECKING THE EDIT ...............................................................................................................16
2.10 PLAYING OUT OR EXPORTING AN EDIT................................................................................18
2.10.1 Playing out the Edit ...............................................................................................................18
2.10.2 Exporting the Edit to a File ....................................................................................................19
3.
IMPORTING MEDIA ............................................................................................. 21
3.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................21
3.1.1 General .................................................................................................................................21
3.1.2 Importable Media ..................................................................................................................22
3.1.3 General Import Process and Mandatory Fields .....................................................................22
3.2 USING EVS SERVERS’ RECORD TRAIN AND CLIPS IN AN EDIT .........................................23
3.2.1 Possible Actions ....................................................................................................................23
3.2.2 How to Import Clips From an EVS Server .............................................................................23
III
Issue 4.1.B
4.
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
SEARCHING FOR AND MANAGING MEDIA ...................................................... 24
4.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................24
4.2 ELEMENT LIST..........................................................................................................................25
4.2.1 Displayed Columns ...............................................................................................................25
4.2.2 Element List Contextual Menu ..............................................................................................25
4.2.3 Opening a Player to View Media ...........................................................................................26
4.3 SEARCHING THE DATABASE ..................................................................................................27
4.3.1 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................27
4.3.2 Quick Text Search.................................................................................................................27
4.3.3 Advanced Filters ...................................................................................................................29
4.3.4 Using Saved Filters ...............................................................................................................35
5.
MANAGING PROJECTS AND PROJECT ELEMENTS ....................................... 37
5.1 PROJECT AREA........................................................................................................................37
5.1.1 Overview ...............................................................................................................................37
5.1.2 Hiding and Displaying the Project Area .................................................................................38
5.1.3 Selecting Items in the Zones of the Project Area ..................................................................38
5.2 PROJECT ZONE .......................................................................................................................39
5.2.1 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................39
5.2.2 Opening an Existing Project ..................................................................................................39
5.2.3 Project Contextual Menu .......................................................................................................39
5.2.4 Creating a New Project .........................................................................................................41
5.2.5 Viewing the Project Data .......................................................................................................42
5.2.6 Importing a Project ................................................................................................................42
5.3 MEDIA ZONE .............................................................................................................................43
5.3.1 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................43
5.3.2 Opening Media in the Player Area ........................................................................................43
5.3.3 Media Contextual Menu ........................................................................................................44
5.4 EDIT ZONE ................................................................................................................................45
5.4.1 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................45
5.4.2 Opening an Existing Edit .......................................................................................................45
5.4.3 Edit Contextual Menu ............................................................................................................45
5.4.4 Creating an Edit ....................................................................................................................47
5.4.5 Duplicating an Edit ................................................................................................................50
5.4.6 Copying an Edit .....................................................................................................................51
5.5 CLIP ZONE ................................................................................................................................52
5.5.1 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................52
5.5.2 Viewing Clips ........................................................................................................................52
5.5.3 Adding clips...........................................................................................................................53
5.5.4 Clip Contextual menu ............................................................................................................53
5.5.5 Assigning Colors to Clips and Filtering on Colors .................................................................54
6.
MAIN WORKSPACE FOR EDITING..................................................................... 56
6.1 EDIT TAB OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................................56
6.2 PLAYER AREA ..........................................................................................................................57
6.2.1 Overview ...............................................................................................................................57
6.2.2 Activating the Player Area .....................................................................................................59
6.2.3 Making the Player Area Full Screen ......................................................................................59
6.2.4 Adjusting the Player Video Display .......................................................................................59
6.2.5 Loading Media onto the Player Area .....................................................................................60
IV
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
6.2.6 Moving Within Media Loaded on the Player Area .................................................................61
6.2.7 Creating and Working with Clips in the Player ......................................................................65
6.2.8 Selecting the Tracks to be Added to the Timeline .................................................................68
6.2.9 Adding Logs to the Media Loaded on the Player Area ..........................................................72
6.2.10 Creating a Clip on an EVS Video Server from the Player area .............................................73
6.3 RECORDER AREA ....................................................................................................................75
6.3.1 Overview ...............................................................................................................................75
6.3.2 Activating the Recorder Area ................................................................................................76
6.3.3 Making the Recorder Area Full Screen .................................................................................76
6.3.4 Adjusting the Recorder Video Display ...................................................................................77
6.3.5 Playing the Edit in the Recorder Area ...................................................................................77
6.3.6 Selecting the Monitored Audio Tracks...................................................................................80
6.3.7 Checking the Edit in the Recorder Area ................................................................................80
6.4 AUDIO METERS / TRIM AREA .................................................................................................81
6.5 TIMELINE AREA ........................................................................................................................83
6.5.1 Overview ...............................................................................................................................83
6.5.2 Timecode Bar........................................................................................................................84
6.5.3 Scale Bar and Move Bar .......................................................................................................85
6.5.4 Reference Positions on the Timeline Display ........................................................................85
6.5.5 Timeline Element on the Timeline Display ............................................................................86
6.5.6 Color Representation on the Timeline Display ......................................................................87
6.5.7 Contextual Menus for Timeline Elements..............................................................................88
6.5.8 Timecode and Duration Fields ..............................................................................................92
6.5.9 Audio Track Selection and Settings in the Timeline ..............................................................93
6.5.10 Editing Buttons in the Timeline Area ...................................................................................100
7.
GENERAL EDITING ........................................................................................... 104
7.1 MARKING POSITIONS ON THE TIMELINE ............................................................................104
7.1.1 Adding Marks ......................................................................................................................104
7.1.2 Adding Mark IN and Mark OUT Over Several Elements .....................................................105
7.1.3 Removing Marks .................................................................................................................105
7.2 SELECTING TECHNIQUES ....................................................................................................106
7.2.1 Selecting a Clip ...................................................................................................................106
7.2.2 Selecting Elements Depending on Nowline or Mark Positions ............................................106
7.3 PLACING CLIPS ONTO THE TIMELINE .................................................................................107
7.3.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................107
7.3.2 Important Prerequisites .......................................................................................................107
7.3.3 Tools to Easily Position Clips in the Timeline ......................................................................110
7.3.4 Placing Clips in an Edit Depending on the Requested Position ..........................................110
7.3.5 Add a Clip To Fill in a Blank Area in the Timeline ...............................................................112
7.4 MOVING CLIPS OR ELEMENTS ON THE TIMELINE .............................................................115
7.4.1 Moving a Clip or Element in the Timeline ............................................................................115
7.4.2 Moving an Audio Clip between Tracks without Modifying its Horizontal Position ................115
7.4.3 Moving Several Elements in the Timeline ...........................................................................116
7.5 REPLACING CLIPS BY LINKED CLIPS ..................................................................................117
7.5.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................117
7.5.2 How to Replace a Clip by a Linked Clip ..............................................................................117
7.6 DELETING CLIPS OR ELEMENTS FROM THE TIMELINE ....................................................118
7.6.1 Deletion Methods ................................................................................................................118
7.6.2 Deletion Modes ...................................................................................................................118
V
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
7.6.3 Deleting Portions of an Edit.................................................................................................119
7.6.4 Deleting Timeline Elements ................................................................................................120
7.7 TIDYING UP AND ORGANIZING THE EDIT ...........................................................................122
7.7.1 Resynchronizing Associated Clip Elements ........................................................................122
7.7.2 Removing Blank Areas on a Timeline .................................................................................122
7.7.3 Aligning Elements on a Reference Element ........................................................................123
7.7.4 Splitting an Element in the Timeline ....................................................................................124
7.7.5 Grouping Elements in a Sync Group ...................................................................................124
7.8 CUE POINTS ...........................................................................................................................125
7.8.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................125
7.8.2 How To Add Cue Points ......................................................................................................125
7.8.3 How To Go to and Select Cue Points..................................................................................126
7.8.4 Contextual Menu for Cue Points .........................................................................................126
7.9 EXTENDING OR SHORTENING CLIPS ..................................................................................127
7.9.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................127
7.9.2 Extend Modes .....................................................................................................................127
7.9.3 Extending or Shortening a Clip............................................................................................128
7.9.4 Extending a Clip with a Still Frame......................................................................................130
7.9.5 Extending or Shortening a Clip by Modifying its Speed.......................................................131
7.10 CREATING FAST MOTION CLIPS ..........................................................................................132
7.10.1 Various Ways to Create Fast Motion Clips..........................................................................132
7.10.2 Modifying the Playback Speed of a Clip Using the Speed Command .................................132
7.10.3 Rendering Fast Motion Clips ...............................................................................................133
7.11 TRIMMING EDIT POINTS ON THE TIMELINE ........................................................................135
7.11.1 Definition and Access to Trim Area .....................................................................................135
7.11.2 Overview on the Trim Functions..........................................................................................135
7.11.3 Trimming or Rolling Around the Clip Transition ...................................................................136
7.11.4 Rolling a Clip .......................................................................................................................137
7.11.5 Retrieving the Source of an Edited Image...........................................................................139
8.
ADVANCED VIDEO EDITING ............................................................................ 140
8.1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................140
8.2 VIDEO TRANSITION EFFECTS ..............................................................................................140
8.2.1 Ways to Add Video Transition Effects .................................................................................140
8.2.2 How to Modify the Default Video Transition Effect ..............................................................141
8.2.3 How to Apply Video Transition Effects Manually .................................................................141
8.2.4 Possible Video Transition Effects ........................................................................................143
8.2.5 Removing Transition Effects ...............................................................................................146
8.2.6 Inserting Blocks of Color Frames ........................................................................................146
8.3 VIDEO CLIP EFFECTS ............................................................................................................148
8.3.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................148
8.3.2 How to Apply a Video Clip Effect.........................................................................................148
8.3.3 Simple Video Clip Effects ....................................................................................................149
8.3.4 Video Clip Effects With Key Frames ...................................................................................152
8.3.5 Adding Key Frames for an Effect ........................................................................................153
8.3.6 Copying and Pasting Video Clip Effects ..............................................................................155
8.4 CONVERSION EFFECTS ........................................................................................................157
8.4.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................157
8.4.2 Changing the Mode for the Conversion Type ......................................................................157
9.
VI
EDITING IN PLACE ............................................................................................ 159
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
9.1 OVERVIEW ..............................................................................................................................159
9.2 SOURCE DEVICE AREA .........................................................................................................161
9.2.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................161
9.2.2 General Description ............................................................................................................161
9.3 WORKSPACE AREA ...............................................................................................................162
9.3.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................162
9.3.2 View Modes in the Workspace ............................................................................................162
9.3.3 Thumbnail View in the Workspace Area .............................................................................163
9.3.4 List View in the Workspace Area.........................................................................................164
9.3.5 Clip Player View in the Workspace Area .............................................................................166
9.4 SELECTING RELEVANT MEDIA .............................................................................................168
9.4.1 Displaying Folder Content in the Source Device Area ........................................................168
9.4.2 Listing Clips in the Workspace Area....................................................................................169
9.4.3 Searching for Clips within the List View ..............................................................................170
9.5 LOADING A SOURCE CLIP ON THE CLIP PLAYER ..............................................................171
9.5.1 Purpose...............................................................................................................................171
9.5.2 How to Load a Clip in the Clip Player ..................................................................................171
9.6 ADDING LOGS TO A CLIP ......................................................................................................171
9.6.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................171
9.6.2 How to Add a Log to a Clip .................................................................................................171
9.6.3 Log Display .........................................................................................................................172
9.6.4 Other Possible Actions on Logs ..........................................................................................173
10. ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING ............................................................................ 174
10.1 OVERALL AUDIO TRACK SETTINGS ....................................................................................174
10.2 AUDIO TRANSITION EFFECTS ..............................................................................................175
10.2.1 Ways to Add Audio Transition Effects .................................................................................175
10.2.2 Adding Automatically Default Audio Transition Effects........................................................175
10.2.3 Modifying the Automatic Default Transition Effect ...............................................................175
10.2.4 Possible Audio Transition Effects ........................................................................................176
10.2.5 Adding Audio Transition Effects on Elements of the Same Track .......................................177
10.2.6 Adding Audio Transition Effects on Elements of the Same Clip ..........................................179
10.2.7 Adjusting Audio Transitions.................................................................................................180
10.2.8 Removing Audio Transitions ...............................................................................................180
10.3 AUDIO ROUTING, SWAPS AND MUTES ...............................................................................181
10.3.1 Default and Specific Audio Routing .....................................................................................181
10.3.2 Possible Audio Channel Functions......................................................................................181
10.3.3 Copying and Pasting Audio Routing Actions .......................................................................182
10.4 AUDIO LEVEL ADJUSTMENTS ..............................................................................................183
10.4.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................183
10.4.2 How to Adjust the Audio Level on a Single Clip ..................................................................183
10.4.3 How to Adjust the Overall Level of a Track .........................................................................184
10.5 MISCELLANEOUS AUDIO FEATURES ..................................................................................185
10.5.1 How to Generate the Waveform of an Audio Element.........................................................185
10.5.2 How to Remove an Audio Waveform ..................................................................................186
10.5.3 How to Duplicate an Audio Track ........................................................................................186
11. VOICEOVER, GRAPHICS AND TEXT GRAPHICS ............................................ 188
11.1 ADDING VOICEOVER .............................................................................................................188
11.1.1 Voiceover Tab Overview .....................................................................................................188
VII
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
11.1.2 Voiceover Process ..............................................................................................................190
11.2 ADDING A LOGO OR GRAPHIC .............................................................................................193
11.2.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................193
11.2.2 Accessing the Tag Manager Window ..................................................................................193
11.2.3 Possible Actions in the Tag Manager Window ....................................................................194
11.2.4 Fields in the Tag Manager Window .....................................................................................195
11.2.5 How to Insert a Logo or Graphic using Tags .......................................................................196
11.2.6 Moving Tag Points ..............................................................................................................197
11.2.7 How to Delete Tags.............................................................................................................198
11.3 ADDING INTEGRATED TEXT AND GRAPHICS .....................................................................199
11.3.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................199
11.3.2 Text Tab Overview ..............................................................................................................199
11.3.3 Character Generator Process .............................................................................................200
11.3.4 Defining the Area to Insert Text/Graphics ...........................................................................200
11.3.5 Adding Text and Graphics to the Edit..................................................................................201
11.3.6 Working with Template of Text and Graphics......................................................................207
11.3.7 Applying a Transition Effect to the CG Area ........................................................................209
11.3.8 Checking the Integrated Text and Graphics ........................................................................209
11.3.9 Editing the Character Generator Page Properties ...............................................................210
12. HEADER MAKER ............................................................................................... 212
12.1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................212
12.2 HEADER MAKER TAB OVERVIEW ........................................................................................212
12.3 OPERATIONS..........................................................................................................................213
13. FINAL STAGES IN THE EDITING PROCESS.................................................... 214
13.1 CHECKING THE EDIT .............................................................................................................214
13.2 PLAYING OUT AN EDIT ..........................................................................................................215
13.2.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................215
13.2.2 Playout Process from the Playout Tab ................................................................................215
13.2.3 Playout Tab .........................................................................................................................216
13.3 EXPORTING AN EDIT OR A MEDIA .......................................................................................218
13.3.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................218
13.3.2 Loading an Edit or a Media on the Export Tab ....................................................................219
13.3.3 Export Tab ..........................................................................................................................220
APPENDIX 1 – SHUTTLEPRO.................................................................................... 228
APPENDIX 2 – KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS ................................................................ 228
APPENDIX 3 – DIGIGRAM HARDWARE SETTINGS ................................................. 230
VIII
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
About this Manual
P URPOSE
This m anua l is a r efer enc e manu al t o Xe dio Clea n Edit.
It sho uld p rovi de yo u wit h gene ral c onte xtua l and concep tua l inf orma tion , as well
as det aile d de scri ptiv e inform atio n on the var io us fea ture s av aila ble in Xedio
CleanE dit.
This re fere nce m anua l will i nclu de pr oced ural inform ati on on more comple x
actio ns, eve n thoug h not systemat ical ly. How ever , it will not co ntai n proc edures
on sim ple or u sual act ion s, whi ch s houl d be cov er ed by vid eo t utor ials .
Some fe ature s may n ot be ful ly doc umen ted fo r versio n 3.1 Xedi o Clea n Edit. In
this ca se, t he doc umen t ation w ill g radua lly b e c omplet ed in the fu ture v ersion s.
Feel fr ee to s end y our re quests on fe atur es you w ould li ke to have d ocum e nted in
more d etai ls t o do c@ev s. tv.
S ECTIONS ON M AIN A REAS ON THE U SER I NTERFACE
The fol lowin g tab le sho w s where y ou can find d et ailed i nfor mati on on t he variou s
areas of the user int erfa c e:
User I nter face Area
Chapter
Projec t ar ea - its fo ur z o nes
Chapte r 5 ‘Man agin g Pro j ects and P roje ct
Elemen ts
Work ar ea - Edi t t ab
Chapte r 6 ‘Mai n Wor kspa ce fo r Edi tin g’
Work ar ea – Voi ceOv er t ab
Sectio n 11 .1 ‘Add ing V oi ceover ’
Work ar ea – Tex t t ab
Sectio n 11 .3 ‘Add ing Inte grated Tex t an d
Graphi cs’
Work ar ea – Hea der M ak er ta b
Chapte r 12 ‘He ader Make r’
Work ar ea – Sch edul er t a b
See Xe dio Inge st O rgan iz er use r ma nual
Work ar ea – Con trol VTR tab
See Xe dio Inge st O rgan iz er use r ma nual
Work ar ea – Pla yout ta b
Sectio n 13 .2. 3 ‘P layo ut T ab’
Work ar ea –Medi a Man ag er, Ed it
Manage r, P roje ct Ma nage r
Chapte r 5 ‘Man agin g Pro j ects and P roje ct
Elemen ts’
Work ar ea – Exp ort tab
Sectio n 13 .3 ‘Expo rtin g a n Edi t or a
Media’
Work ar ea – Med ia I mpor ter t ab
Chapte r 3 ‘Imp orti ng Me d ia’
IX
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Work ar ea – Dev ices tab
X
Chatre r 9 ‘Edi ting in Plac e’
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
What’s New on
CleanEdit V3.02 and
V4.01?
The fol lowin g tab le des cr ibes th e sect ions u pdat e d to refl ect t he new a nd modifi ed
featu res on Xedi o Clea n Edit fr om Xed io Su ite 3 . 02 and 4 .01 ( compa red t o Xedio
Suite 3.0 1).
In the user man ual , the icon
has been adde d on left margi n to highl ight
inform atio n on new and u pdated fe atur es.
Click th e sect ion num ber (or the des crip tion ) in t he tabl e to jump d irec tly to the
corres pond ing sect ion.
Sectio n
Descri ption
Removal of t he expla nat i ons conce rnin g the XT Clips tab
that is n ow i nteg rate d in t he Med ia M anage r t ab
2.4.2
Note co ncer ning the w o rk with hig h reso lut ion and low
resolu tion med ia.
2.9, 6.3. 7
Possib ilit y to c heck the edit fo r miss ing h i-re s files . A
missin g hi-re s file c an be identi fied by a ye llow t ri angle in
the e dit if the opti on h as been s et in X edio Mana g er.
3.1.1 , 3. 1.2
Possib ilit y to impor t me dia fr om CANON Compa ct Flas h
drive
4.1
A Tod ay t ab is autom atic ally adde d t o t he S aved Filter s.
It co rresp onds to ‘cre ati o n dat e = toda y’.
4.3.1
Quick Text sea rch can n ow be appl ied tog ethe r with a n
advanc ed f ilt er, w ith an A ND oper ator .
4.3.3
Filter Fiel ds: Th e mos t r elevan t par amet ers ar e li sted on
the t op o f th e l ist.
4.3.3
Search Fie lds Types : l ogi cal o pera tors now repl ac e tex t.
5.2.4
Use of the vid eo s tan dar d in proj ects
5.4.3
Make L ocal opt ion for edi ts.
5.5.4
New Cli p Pr oper ties win d ow.
6.2.6 , 6. 3.5
New use of th e J-K-L keyboar d shor tcuts a s Player
Transp ort C ontr ols
XI
Issue 4.1.B
XII
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Sectio n
Descri ption
9
Device s ta b an d ed itin g i n pla ce f eatu re.
13.3. 3
Export Ta b - Expor ting t o Device: p ossi bili ty to export a
file to a SxS car d.
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
1. Introduction
1.1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Xedio Cle anEd it is a non -linea r edit ing sys tem of f ering fu ll int egra tion wi th remote
camcor ders – Sony X DC AM™, XDCAM EX™ an d Panaso nic P 2™ in SD and HD.
Xedio C lean Edit enab les journa lis ts to edit sto ries in sta ndar d and hig h-de finit io n
from remot e loca tion s. A s soon as the edi tor is ba ck in the newsr oom, th e edit can
be shar ed thr ough this integ rate d news p rodu ct ion sys tem. I n add itio n, Xedio
CleanE dit can be o pera te d remo tely on a la ptop or inst alle d on a PC .
1.2
MAIN WINDOW
The Clea nEdi t user i nter f ace is com pose d of two d istin ct zon es, hi ghli ghte d on the
image bel ow. Eac h zone contain s well def ined f uncti ons in the wo rkfl ow of the
CleanE dit appl icat ion.
1
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Area Nu mber
Area Na me
1.
Projec t ar ea
See se ctio n 1 .3 ‘Z ones in the Proj ect Area’ on pag e 3.
2.
Work ar ea
See se ctio n 1 .4 ‘T abs in t he Wor k Are a’ o n p age 4.
2
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
1.3
ZONES IN THE PROJECT AREA
The left han d part of th e inter face is ca lled th e Project
area. It s func tion i s to permit t he user t o mana ge a
projec t and al l the el ements wi thin t he proj ects,
multip le e dits , med ia u se d with in t he pr ojec t an d clips
and m edia use d o n t he time line of ed its with in the
projec t.
The Pr ojec t ar ea co nta in s the proj ects cre ated b y the
logged -on ed itor . The Pr oject ar ea is div ided i nto four
zones to sort the dif fere n t elem ents of each pro jec t:
• The Pro ject zone con tai ns a li st o f the proj ects for
the lo gged on us er. T he open p rojec t is disp laye d in
bold chara cter s.
• The Med ia zo ne co ntai n s the o rigi nal m edia fil es
that a re use d in the op en projec t. Th e med ia lo ad ed
is di spla yed in b old char a cters.
• The Ed it z one cont ains the l ist of e dits tha t ha ve
been c reat ed on t he o pen proj ect. The edi t lo aded is
displa yed in bold cha ract ers.
• The Cli p zo ne co ntai n s list of c lips sto red in
prepar atio n f or t he e dit.
Each pro ject o nly co ntai ns the el ement s that h av e been dee med to b e rel evant t o
it. The abil ity t o acce ss elemen ts fr om anyw here in the d atab ase o f an in s talla tion
and dec lare t hem re leva n t to a pro ject , to a llow s h aring o f medi a amon gst s everal
workst atio ns, is a fun dam ental par t of the str uctu re of Cl eanE dit .
3
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
1.4
TABS IN THE WORK AREA
1.4.1
INTRODUCTION
The Work area ha s tabs for the mode s that the u ser could be wor king in , such as
timeli ne or vo iceo ver mo des used i n the ed it pro cess, or o ther mo des wh ich ar e
for othe r areas o f the CleanE dit wor kflow , fro m media ing est and im port, to
playou t a s vi deo, or rend ering a c omple ted edi t to one spec ific form at f or t he us e
of an othe r sys tem.
Note
The numbe r of tabs di s played i n the Work Are a depends o n optio ns
purcha sed, whic h al lows the cu stom ers to ha ve a system cus tomiz ed t o
their requ ireme nts a nd avoid w orki ng mo des t h at are not n eede d in
their work flow .
1.4.2
SELECTING A TAB IN THE WORK AREA
Any ta b in the Wo rk a re a is au toma tica lly s elec t ed by p laci ng t he mo use over a
tab a t th e to p o f th e Wor k area unt il t he t ab b ecom es vis ibl e or by clic king t he ta b.
4
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
2. The Basics
2.1
INTRODUCTION
This p art will gui de y ou t hrough a s impl e wor kflow for the C lean Edit app lic ation t o
produc e a simpl e ed it, and ei ther pla y it out fr om the app lica tion or c reate a
standa rd file for use or pl ayout by anot her syste m.
The st eps are:
1. Starti ng C lean Edit
2. Openin g a New P roje ct
3. Findin g Me dia for the Pro ject
4. Adding Med ia t o th e Pr oj ect
5. Refini ng M edia Int o Cl ips
6. Placin g Cl ips onto the Ti meline
7. Checki ng t he E dit
8. Playin g ou t or Exp orti ng an Edi t
Each s tep is descr ibed at i ts m ost basi c on ly usin g on scr een cont r ols. Any
keyboa rd shor tcut s, whi ch could be us ed, wil l be detaile d in the fo llowin g
chapte rs.
The edit cr eate d using t h e techni ques in t his cha p ter will be vi deo wit h ass ociat ed
audio cli ps o nly and edit e d with a c ut as t he t rans it ion.
2.2
STARTING CLEANEDIT
1.
Click on t he C leanE dit ic on on the des ktop to star t the app lica tion
OR
Select th e ap plic atio n fr o m the Star t men u.
A log in sc reen wil l th en a ppear.
2.
Enter your use r nam e a n d pass word , an d th en c lic k OK.
Note:
The sys tem admin istr at or cre ates log in na mes and p asswo rds i n th e
Xedio Man ager ap plic ati on. Plea se refe r to that produc t user man ual for
more d etai ls.
5
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
2.3
OPENING A NEW PROJECT
2.3.1
INITIAL WINDOW DISPLAY
On star tup t he ap plic ati on will open as sh own below w ith l ogos in th e video
windows and all ico ns d i sabled , sh owin g an inac ti ve sta te. Ther e wil l be n ames i n
the Pr ojec t zo ne if t his lo gin h as b een used to pre viousl y wo rk o n a Proj ect .
2.3.2
PROJECT DEFINITION
A proj ect, in t he X edio e nviron ment , is a ki nd of worksp ace f or a give n st ory. I t is
a flat str uctur e. A proj e ct alwa ys b elon gs to 0 or 1 us er. A pro ject ca nnot b e
shared bet ween use rs ( d uplica te is ma ndat ory in t his ca se).
2.3.3
HOW TO CREATE A NEW PROJECT
When yo u rig ht-c lick in t he Pro ject area and s ele ct New, the New Pr ojec t dialo g
box d ispla ys, whic h al low s you to crea te a new pro ject:
6
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
When y ou c reat e a new p roject , y ou h ave to s peci f y the fol lowi ng c harac teri stics :
•
Projec t na me
A defaul t label fo r the n ew projec t is autom atic al ly assign ed. You ca n cha nge
it.
•
Video stan dard
The vi deo s tand ard s peci fies t he r esol utio n and fr equenc y th at wi ll b e use d for
playin g o ut, expo rtin g or render ing the proj ect .
Once you cl ick OK to v alida te the new pr ojec t, the projec t chara cter ist ics are
record ed i n th e d atab ase
When a pro jec t is ope n, its name is dis play ed i n bol d ch arac ters in the Proj ec t
zone.
2.4
FINDING MEDIA FOR THE PROJECT
2.4.1
MAKING MEDIA AVAILABLE IN XEDIO CLEANEDIT
During th is w orkf low, it will be ass umed tha t t he me dia is avai labl e i n Xed i o
CleanE dit. To be av aila b le in Xedi o Cl eanEd it, th e medi a ne eds to be ‘im ported ’
into Xed io Clea nEdi t an d set to ‘Pu blis h’, in o t her words d efin ed in th e Xedio
databa se. A me dia w hich is no t pu blis hed is o nly visib le throu gh X edio M anager ,
Xedio Brows e an d Xe dio Approv al.
Import ing m edia in to C leanEd it c an b e do ne, among oth ers, via th e Medi a
Import er. For mor e infor mation , refer to t he sect i on 3 ‘Import ing Med ia’, on page
21. Imp orti ng me dia a l ways imp lies tha t the media i s def ined in t h e Xedio
databa se bu t does not always m ean th at it is physic ally impor ted t o t he Xedi o
storag e sy stem .
Other wa ys to im port or refer ence a new m edia in X edio a re: XT Access ,
IPDGat eway, Xed io D ispa tcher , Xed io A utoF ileI mp orter.
2.4.2
WHERE TO FIND MEDIA IN XEDIO CLEANEDIT
The Med ia M anag er ta b i n the Work area is used t o brin g th e med ia t hat is defin ed
in th e da taba se i nto a pr oject .
Note:
The XT cli ps a re l iste d wi th th e ot her medi a in the Media Manag er tab.
7
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
You wil l sea rch t he med i a in th is ta b, th en dr ag and dro p it to th e Med ia zone o f
your p roje ct.
You wil l fin d belo w a gen eral de scri ptio n on t he m edia th at ca n be av ail abl e in thi s
tab.
You wi ll find mor e d etai ls on the sear ch filt ers avai lable and po ssib le o pera t ions in
the Medi a Manag er tab i n the sect ion 4 ‘S earc hi ng for and M anag ing Me dia’, o n
page 2 4.
The Me dia M anag er t ab l i sts t he me dia avai labl e i n Xedio Cle anEd it.
The me dia list ed a re a ll t he pub lis hed m edia tha t have the corre ct b itr ate.
This c an b e:
•
video , stil ls (fu ll fram e or with a ke y layer ) and audio fi les imp orte d via the
Xedio Impo rter or the M e dia Im port er t ab f rom a n extern al s tora ge s ystem . The
metada ta rela ted to the file is add ed a t the time of impo rt or recor ding . For
more i nform ati on, refe r to the M edia Imp orte r us er manual .
•
media f iles i mpor ted vi a the Xed io Imp orte r or th e Media Im port er ta b fro m a
Sony XD CAM o r XDC AM EX or Pana soni c P2 cam eras.
•
clips r efer ence d in t he Xedio d atab ase a nd ph y sical ly sto red a n XT or XS
server on the netw ork.
•
clips tra nsfer red from XFi le, XS trea m, X TAcce ss o r IPD G atewa y
•
media file s in gest ed from the Xedi o en coder s us in g the Xed io I nges t Or gani zer
•
media file s im port ed a uto matica lly via the Xedi o A utoFil e Im port er.
Note
Xedio Cl eanE dit c an wor k with hi gh res olu tion a n d low res olut ion me dia.
There is n o re stri ctio n on the reso luti on o f th e l ow resolu tion med ia.
The d efau lt vide o r esol ution fo r pr oxy vid eo browsi ng, edi ting an d
encodi ng i s spe cif ied i n the So ftwa re p arame ter s > Gen eral > Ge nera l
tab i n Xe dio M anag er.
8
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
2.4.3
Issue 4.1.B
VIEWING MEDIA BEFORE ADDING IT TO THE PROJECT
When you wa nt to vie w a ny media av aila ble on t h ese tabs p rior t o addin g i t to the
Media zone of a pr ojec t, select th e re quir ed me dia and doub le-cl ick on it:
The Clean Edit Me dia Pl ayer wind ow will op en w ith fami liar co ntro ls to v iew the
materi al. A sect ion of th e media coul d be selec t ed here to be pla ced o nto the
timeli ne.
However , this is mor e u sual to tak e the whol e m edia int o a proje ct an d select
sectio ns of t he med ia usi ng the ri ght me dia di spla y in the Ed it tab , whic h i s calle d
the Pla yer a rea. F or mor e infor mati on, r efer to th e secti on 6. 2 ‘Pl ayer A r ea’, on
page 5 7.
9
Issue 4.1.B
2.5
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
CREATING AN EDIT
You f irst ne ed to crea te a new ed it or o pen an e xisti ng e dit be fore you c an ad d
media to the timel ine rela ted t o a give n ed it, or ad d eff ects on the time line .
Right- clic king in t he Ed it zon e ope ns a cont e xtual
menu. W hen y ou s elec t New in this menu , a N e w Edit
dialo g box is disp laye d, which al lows y ou to c rea te a
new ed it.
You can a ccep t the defa u lt name
or enter a new na me. A
descri ptio n an d oth er m etada ta
can be save d with t he Edit
defin itio n int o the d atab a se. You
will fi nd de tail ed in forma tion on
the f ields in the N e w Edit
window , in the sec tio n 5.4 .4
‘Creat ing an E dit’ , o n pa g e 47.
When you val idat e the n ew edit
defin itio n cli ckin g OK, t he edi t
charac teri stic s are re co rded in
the d atab ase.
When an edit i s activ e (open),
its nam e is disp laye d in bold i n
the E dit zone an d th e timeli ne
icons are enab led.
10
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
2.6
ADDING MEDIA TO THE PROJECT
When you hav e iden tifi e d the media r equir ed in the datab ase usi ng the Media
Manage r ta b, you can ad d it to your med ia, to you r edi t, or d irec tly to the t imelin e
by cl ickin g o n it and dra g ging it o nto one of the Pr oject sub- zone s.
Each dra g acti on pro duce s a diffe rent r esul t. The p ossibl e act ions a re exp lai ned i n
the t able bel ow.
Note:
If you do no t want to p la ce the m edia dire ctly in the tim elin e, e nsure tha t
the F ill icon is not act ive
.
You wan t to …
You nee d to …
Add th e me dia to the proj ect, w itho ut
furth er ac tio n.
Drag and dro p the med ia to the Med ia
zone.
Add th e me dia to y our pr oject and in
the Cl ip z one, bu t no t to t he tim elin e.
Drag and dr op the me dia to the Edit z one
or Clip zo ne wit hout a c tivat ing th e Fill
icon.
Add th e me dia to y our pr oject , in the
Clip z one, and pla ce it a t the end of
the t imel ine.
Activa te th e Fil l ico n, th en drag and dr op
the me dia to the C lip zon e.
11
Issue 4.1.B
2.7
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
REFINING MEDIA INTO CLIPS
To mark cli ps f rom the m edia in a proj ect , it is ne cessar y to view th e med i a in the
Player win dow o n t he Ed i t tab .
Once you ar e in the Ed it tab, pr ocee d as foll o ws to view the me dia a nd mark
sectio ns for incl usio n on the t imel ine:
1.
Select t he requ este d me dia from th e Media zo ne and double -cli ck on it or
drag it t o th e Pl ayer win d ow. I t wil l o pen in t he P la yer wi ndow.
2.
Play the m edia usi ng
• the t rans port con trol s on the p anel ,
• the k eyboa rd s hort cuts or
• the o ptio nal remot e co ntr ol pa nel (Shu ttleP RO).
3.
4.
5.
Mark a n IN poi nt b y cl icki ng on the
icon o n th e pa nel.
Option ally , a dd a name f or th e cl ip i n th e te xt fiel d.
Mark a n OUT poi nt b y cl i cking on the
ico n on the panel .
The du rati on o f t he c lip w ill t hen be d ispl ayed .
12
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
The to p ar ea r epre sent s t he who le l engt h o f th e or i ginal medi a.
The cu rren t po siti on w ithi n the cli p is sho wn by a b lue ma rker .
The IN poi nt i s d ispla yed below the Play er w indow as a green mar ker.
The OUT poi nt w ill be r ep resent ed b y a red mark er line .
For more inf orma tion on these item s, refe r to t he secti on 6.2. 1 ‘Over vi ew’, on
page 5 7
Note
IN and OUT point s can b e moved by sele ctin g the marks on the medi a bar
and drag ging t hem to t he requi red po siti on, or by typing d irec tly th e
timeco de f ield s be side s t he mar k IN and mark OU T but tons .
13
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
2.8
PLACING CLIPS ONTO THE TIMELINE
2.8.1
INTRODUCTION
There ar e many dif fere nt ways to add cl ips ont o your edi t. The ma in meth ods fo r
placin g a cli p to you r ed it are one of t he f ollo wing :
•
Draggi ng th e cli p into the Clip zo ne whe n the F ill i con
icons in the time line are a ) is acti ve.
(next to the Ed itin g
This a dds the cli p to the end o f th e ti meli ne.
•
Draggi ng t he c lip from th e Clip zon e to a give n po sitio n in the edi t.
•
Draggi ng t he c lip from th e Play er t o a giv en p osit i on in the edi t.
You wil l fin d comp rehe ns ive inf orma tion on th e va rious w ays to plac e cli ps into an
edit in t he s ecti on 7 .3 ‘Pl acing Clip s on to the T ime line’ , on pag e 10 7.
14
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
2.8.2
MARKING POSITION ON THE TIMELINE
Using th e icons d ispla ye d on the scre ensh ot bel ow, you can ma rk poin ts to edit
accura tely on the tim elin e. Yo u ca n us e t hese m arks to p lace you r cl ips into the
timeli ne.
The fo llow ing marks can be de fine d in the tim elin e :
Name
Descri ption
To def ine t he mark, …
Nowlin e
blue vert ical lin e, w hich
displa ys the curre nt
posit ion on t he t imel ine
click on the tim elin e ru le r wher e y ou w ant
to pl ace the nowl ine.
Mark IN
green vert ical li ne,
which disp lays the
posit ion of a mark IN
point
place the no wlin e a t t he r equest ed posi tion
red ve rtic al line , whi ch
displa ys the posi tion of
a mark OUT poin t
place the no wlin e a t t he r equest ed posi tion
Mark OU T
2.8.3
and c lick the Mark IN ico n
.
and c lick the Mark OUT i con
MODE TO PLACE THE CLIP ONTO THE TIMELINE
Before you drag a c lip o nto t he t imeli ne, you nee d to d efin e th e way you want t o
insert it . Two mod es a re availa ble : Ove rwri te o r I nsert.
You sel ect t he mod e by clicki ng th e Over writ e/In sert Mod e icon (lef t ico n above
the t imel ine disp lay) , whi ch al lows the user to tog gle t he mo de.
15
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Mode
Descri ption
Overwr ite
adds th e media in the timeli ne, o verwr itin g the existi ng
media f rom th e sele cte d posit ion. In ot her wo rds, th e
media in the time line wi ll be rem oved from th e insert ion
point by the dura tion of t he add ed m edia .
(defau lt)
(white )
Insert
(orang e)
adds t he m edia in the ti meline wit hout over writ in g exis ting
media an d pushe s furt her right the e xist ing ele men ts of the
timeli ne p lace d a fter thi s posit ion.
In this mo de, yo u can o nly inse rt th e media o n the clip
bounda ries whi ch a re c o mmon t o al l se lect ed t rac ks.
2.9
CHECKING THE EDIT
When the ed it is comp let ed it is poss ible t o chec k it. Xedi o CleanE dit pa r ses the
timeli ne f or po ssib le er ro rs (la ck of vid eo, f or e xa mple) o r mis sing hi-r es f iles ( if
this has been set in Xedi o Mana ger) .
To do so, cli ck t he CH EC K butt on.
•
If a ho le is dis cover ed a dialo gue b ox op ens a nd gives a time ref erenc e on the
timeli ne for w here the re i s no vide o.
In th is c ase, the R2B but t on wil l no t b ecome ava ila ble.
•
16
If missi ng hi-r es fil es ar e discov ered , a dialo gue box opens and g ives th e list
of mis sing fi les.
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
In thi s ca se, the R 2B b utton beco mes a vail able as soo n as you clic k O K to
acknow ledg e th e mes sag e.
A
•
ic on i s di spla yed on e ach l o-res fi le o n th e ti m eline .
If a fast moti on clip is de tecte d a dialog ue box op ens via whic h you can re nder
the fast mot ion cli p(s) . T he tr ansc odin g c odec us ed fo r t he rend erin g o f a fas t
motion cli p is se t in Xed i o Mana ger.
If yo u ch oose No:
o
The CHECK but ton re ma ins enab led, s ince n ot-re ndered f ast mot ion cl ips
are s till pre sent in the ed it.
o
The R2B (re ady to b road cast) but ton remai ns d isa bled.
If th e ed it is c heck ed s uccess full y, the CHECK butto n wi ll b e di sabl ed and t h e
R2B (rea dy to broa dcas t) but ton wi ll be enab le d. See a lso t he se ctio n 6.3.7
‘Check ing the Edit in the Record er Ar ea’, on pag e 80.
17
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
2.10 PLAYING OUT OR EXPORTING AN EDIT
When an edi t ha s bee n comple ted , it can eith e r be im medi atel y pla yed out a s
video or re nder ed to a fil e type for tr ansf er to ano ther sys tem or use d by th e othe r
Xedio sof tware sui te.
2.10.1 PLAYING OUT THE EDIT
I NTRODUCTION
Playin g out an edi t con si sts of ‘ outp utt ing’ t he ed i t strai ght t o an SD I con n ectio n.
The pl ayou t o ptio n is th erefor e av aila ble onl y o n work stat ions equ ippe d with an
EVS SDI ou tput boa rd (P CX2 or PCX3 ).
You ca n pl ay o ut an e dit from t wo d iffe rent ‘lo cat io ns’:
•
from t he X edio Cle anEd it appl icat ion, via the Pla y out t ab.
You us e su ch a sol utio n when y ou wa nt to p layo ut some edit s in divi dual ly.
This s ecti on w ill cove r th e pla yout from Pla yout ta b.
•
from t he X edio Pla yout O rganiz er.
You use su ch a sol utio n when you wa nt to m anage se vera l edit s in your
playou t, and/ or wh en a d edica ted play out serve r i s ins tall ed o n yo ur s etup .
This s ecti on i s co vere d in the Play out Organ izer us er man ual.
Both p layo ut s olu tions c annot be u sed at the s ame ti me o n th e sam e machin e
becaus e the y woul d bot h try to a tta ch to t he E VS SDI ou tput b oard (P CX2 or
PCX3).
P LAYOUT P ROCESS FROM THE P LAYOUT T AB
1.
Activa ting the Play out t ab:
Move t he m ouse poi nter over the P layo ut tab.
2.
Preloa ding the edit :
You ca n pl ay a n ed it w he ther it i s re ady to b road c ast o r no t.
To pre load th e ed it f or t he pl ayou t, s elec t t he e d it fr om t he E dit zone in t he
18
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
Projec ts a rea and drag it anywhe re o nto the Play o ut ta b wor k ar ea.
The ed it is r eady to be p l ayed o ut.
3.
Playin g th e ed it:
To play the edi t, you ca n direct ly use the usu al contro l comman ds avai la ble
on th e ri ght part of the wi ndow.
For mo re info rmat ion on the P layo ut tab, re fer to the s ecti on 13.2 .3 ‘Pla yo ut
Tab’, on page 216 .
2.10.2 EXPORTING THE EDIT TO A FILE
I NTRODUCTION
This se ctio n pres ents h ow you ca n exp ort a n e dit to a fil e in Xe dio Cl eanEdi t,
select ing :
•
a form at f rom a li st o f s u pporte d co dec
•
a des tina tion .
However , Xed io Cle anEd it make s it po ssib le to export the f inal edit to severa l
desti nati ons:
•
to Cle anEd it.
This a llows you to c onso l idate an e dit a nd s tore it as a si ngle cli p in the Xe dio
storag e sy stem and Xed i o dat abase .
•
to Fi le
This all ows you t o expo rt an edit to a fil e that can be rea d by an ext er nal
system .
•
to Dev ice
This all ows you to e xpor t an edit to an ex tern al device , eith er a vide o ta pe
record er, or t o an EVS se rver.
•
to Tar get
This all ows you to ex port an edit and to per form a predefi ned set o f opera ti ons
for s peci fic w orkf lows .
For de tail ed i nform ati on, refer to the sect ion 13. 3 ‘Exp orti ng a n Edi t or a Media ’,
on pag e 2 18.
E XPORT P ROCESS TO A F ILE
When yo u us e th e Exp ort to a F ile fea ture , you ca n expo rt t he ed it to a fil e in a n
Mpeg2 forma t, even if the orig inal edi t was in a mi x of m any dif feren t f ile ty pes.
This s ecti on g ives you an overv iew on t he e xpor t p rocess :
1.
Activa te th e r elev ant E x port t ype:
Move t he m ouse poi nter over the E xpor t ta b a nd s elect the To F ile sub- tab .
2.
Load th e ed it t o be exp orted:
19
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
You ca n ex port an edi t w hether it is read y to bro a dcast or not.
Drag and dr op the re que sted edi t from th e Edit z one to the op en exp ort s ubtab. The inf orma tion gro up bo x, as w ell as the Fi le Nam e l abel , i s f ill ed w it h
the i nform atio n re lat ed t o the file .
3.
Specif y th e Exp ort sett i ngs:
Specif y the dest inat ion f older wh ere y ou wan t to export the ed it to and t he
codec prof ile , whi ch w i ll de termi ne the fina l f ormat of the edit in t he
desti nati on f olde r. F or more i nform ati on o n th e Expo rt t ab, ref er t o the
sectio n 1 3.3 ‘Expo rti ng a n Edi t or a Me dia’ , o n pa ge 218 .
4.
Launch the Expor t Pr oc ess:
Click the Star t bu tton to begin the con versi on p ro cess.
A progr ess b ar ab ove t h e Start butt on al lows yo u to mon itor the p rogr es s of
the p roces s.
20
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
3. Importing Media
3.1
INTRODUCTION
3.1.1
GENERAL
CleanE dit o ffer s a way of acquir ing me dia f iles for use wit hin t he sys tem. T hrough
the Med ia Imp orte r tab, a uthor ized u sers m ay imp ort med ia tha t hav e alre a dy been
record ed an d are in fi le format . Onc e the file s ar e impor ted a nd se t to ‘ P ublish ’,
they becom e av aila ble in the Me dia Mana ger tab.
You ca n pe rfor m th e sam e impo rts from :
•
the Xe dio Mana ger appl ic ation , in the Med ia c ateg ory, M edia Imp orte r to ol.
•
the Xe dio Impo rter app lic ation
The co mmon impor t f unct ions are expla ined in the Xedio Impo rter use r man ual.
21
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
The fol lowin g sec tion s pr ovide o nly an o verv iew o n the imp ort fu nct ions , a nd deal
with f eat ures spec ific to t he Med ia I mpor ter tab in CleanE dit.
3.1.2
IMPORTABLE MEDIA
When yo u cl ick the M edi a Impor ter tab, the Medi a Impo rter wind ow is dis p layed in
the work are a, all owing you to sele ct medi a to i mport. Se vera l tabs are availa ble
depend ing on the type of media you want to impor t :
•
XDCAM, X DCAMEX , P2 a nd CANON sub- tabs
To impor t media file s rec orded on S ony XDC AM a nd XDCAM EX, P anas oni c P2
or CANON cam eras
•
Video/A udio /Sti lls sub-t ab
To imp ort m edia fi les, im age or aud io file s
•
RTD sub -tab
To imp ort vide o co ntai nin g tra nsit ions
•
EVS Se rver sub- tab
To impor t med ia fi les a v ailab le on a n EVS serve r on the s ame n etwor k as the
Xedio su ite . In th is cas e, Xedio do es not impor t t he file c onte nt in to the X edio
storag e syst em, but cr e ates a refe renc e to the server fil es in the X e dio
databa se.
Note
The manda tory f ield na m es are disp laye d in red in the user int erfa ce as
long as y ou d o no t de fine a va lue for them .
Warnin g mess ages are a lso dis play ed a t the bott om of th e tab to t el l
the u ser w hich fie lds sho uld b e fi lled in.
3.1.3
GENERAL IMPORT PROCESS AND MANDATORY FIELDS
The impo rt pro cess i s si milar in a ll ta bs. How eve r, the fi le-r elat ed in forma tion yo u
can pr ovid e de pend s on t he fi le t o im port .
In each sub- tab an d for all impor t sessi ons, th e mandat ory ste ps and inf ormati o n
are t he f ollow ing :
1.
Specif y wh ere the M edia Import er w ill find the sou rce f iles to be i mpor ted.
2.
Specif y th e Lab el f ield , t hat is to say t he n ame o f the m edia whe n it will be
import ed i nto Xedi o Cl ea nEdit .
3.
Tick the Pu blis hed che c k box to make th e media availab le and vi sibl e to all
users.
4.
Click t he Sta rt Imp ort P rocess butt on at the bo t tom of t he Med ia Imp ort er
tab.
Once i mpor ted, the fil es will b e av aila ble in the M edia M anag er t ab.
22
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
3.2
USING EVS SERVERS’ RECORD TRAIN
AND CLIPS IN AN EDIT
3.2.1
POSSIBLE ACTIONS
You have se veral p ossi bi litie s to brin g the EVS s erver mat eria l as media or clips
into a pr ojec t, u sing the EVS Se rver tab :
•
Drag an d drop a rec orde r chann el fr om the Serv e rs list in th e EVS S erve r tab
to th e Med ia area of a pr oject :
This w ill m ake the corr espond ing reco rd t rain availa ble in the proj ect as a
media.
•
Drag a nd drop a clip fro m the Cli p/Cha nnel ar ea in th e EV S Se rver ta b to th e
Clips area of a pr ojec t:
This w ill make the corr es pondin g c lip avai labl e in the p roje ct a s a clip .
•
3.2.2
Import th e cl ips crea ted with the give n ca mera or stor ed i n t he g iven pag e or
bank. To d o t his, ref er t o the s ecti on b elow.
HOW TO IMPORT CLIPS FROM AN EVS SERVER
Import ing cli ps from an EVS Server i nto Cle anEd it does not ph ysic ally im port the
clip in the me dia s erver : it cre ates a virt ual l oc ation o n the m edia serv er, and
stores t he clip de fin itio n in the Xedio da taba se. Conseq uent ly, the c onne ction to
the s erver s ne eds to b e o perat iona l to be able to a ccess the mate rial its elf .
It is po ssib le to impor t a ll the c lips crea ted wi th a given camer a, or s tore d on a
given page or ban k in to CleanE dit, to ma ke th em avail able in th e Med ia Manage r
and Ed it M anag er t abs.
To imp ort clip s fr om a n E VS ser ver, pro ceed as fol lows:
1.
Select the req uest ed c a mera, page or b ank in t he Ser ver S truc ture are a of
the EV S Se rver tab .
All the clip s cre ated w ith the sel ecte d cha nnel or s tored o n the sele cted pa ge
or ban k ar e di spla yed in t he Cli p/Ch anne l ar ea.
2.
Specif y th e Lab el f ield , t hat is to say t he n ame o f the m edia whe n it will be
import ed i nto Xedi o Cl ea nEdit . By def ault , th e cl ip name will be take n ov er.
3.
Ensure th at the Pub lish check box i s ticke d to make the med ia avai labl e and
visib le t o al l us ers.
4.
Click t he Sta rt Imp ort P rocess butt on at the bo t tom of t he Med ia Imp ort er
tab.
Once i mpor ted, the fil es will b e av aila ble in the M edia M anag er t ab.
23
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
4. Searching for and
Managing Media
4.1
INTRODUCTION
Within th e Wo rk Area, t h ere a re thre e t abs des ign ed to qu ickl y f ind and br o wse t he
corres pond ing e lemen ts presen t wit hin th e dat ab ase, su ch as me dia , edi ts and
projec ts.
Each t ab h as a sim ilar lo ok:
The u pper par t o f t he W o rk ar ea give s ac cess to t he di ffer ent fi lter s wh ich can b e
appli ed t o th e el emen t li s t.
At le ast two tabs exi st o n the left of the Work are a .
•
The Filt er 0 tab : The ele ment lis t disp lays t he lis t of all el ement s pres ent in
the d atab ase, or it r etur n s the res ult of a sea rch a pplie d to the lis t.
•
The T oday ta b: the ele ment list sh own the ele ments wit h ‘c reat ion dat e =
today ’.
Addit iona l ta bs ar e di spl ayed w hen the users ha ve sav ed f ilte rs a ppli ed to t he
databa se. Refe r to sec tio n ‘Usi ng S aved Fil ters ’ o n page 35 for more det ail s.
The li st prese nts colu mns to d ispl ay a ll m etad ata a ssocia ted with the el eme nts.
M EDIA M ANAGER T AB
The Medi a Man ager t ab allows you t o quic kly f ind and brow se th e ava ilab l e media
presen t in the s ystem . T his med ia ca n be v ideo ( includ ing X T cli ps), audi o or st ill
files .
Media c an be shar ed betwee n all user s and severa l wor ksta tion s, enabl ing
multip le a cces ses to b ro wse, s elec t an d im port m edia into any pro ject .
E DIT M ANAGER T AB
The Ed it m anag er t ab all ows us ers to see and bro wse th roug h al l e dits cur r ently in
the data base . Edits c an be delet ed or unde let ed and share d betwe en use rs fro m
this tab.
P ROJECT M ANAGER T AB
The Proje ct man ager ta b allows us ers to se e and brows e thro ugh al l projec t s
curren tly in the data base .
Projec ts ca n be sh ared betwee n user s to e nabl e severa l work stat ions to use the
same me dia , ad d new me dia a nd e ven open and m odify edi ts w ithi n th e pr oj ect.
24
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
4.2
ELEMENT LIST
4.2.1
DISPLAYED COLUMNS
It is pos sibl e to re-a rr ange the c olum ns orde r , and to ad d or remov e some
column s.
Right- clic king on an y o f the col umn hea ding s d i splays a con text ual men u. Th e
Choose Di spla yed Colu mns opti on ope ns the Select V isib le Col umns window
allowi ng y ou t o ch oose th e col umns you w ant to be disp layed in the ele ment list .
The col umn wi dth a nd or der can be ad just ed us in g stand ard c ompu ter co mmand s
and dr ag a nd drop tech ni ques.
4.2.2
ELEMENT LIST CONTEXTUAL MENU
A cont extu al men u is av ailab le whe n yo u rig ht-c l ick on an i tem in the lis t. The
optio ns ma y di ffer acc ord ing t o th e ta b se lect ed.
Menu It em
Descri ption
Play
Opens a n ew Pla yer wi n dow to al low t he ele men t to be
browse d and mo dif ied. T he Play er win dow is the same as
descri bed in the se ctio n 4.2.3 ‘ Open ing a Pl ayer to View
Media’ , on pag e 26 .
or
Run Pla yer (CueP oin t
Mgr)
Render List
Opens a wind ow lis ting all type s of rend erin g th at have
been d one with the ed it o r medi a.
Archiv e His tory
Displa ys the li st of the ar chive an d resto re proc es ses that
were a chie ved for the sel ected edi t or medi a.
View P roper ties
Displa ys th e pro pert ies f or the sele cted m edia or edit. If a
defau lt me tada ta prof ile has be en d efi ned for the media, a
metada ta t ab d ispl ays th e medi a/ed it m etad ata va lues.
Hidden Stat e
Availa ble only fo r th e pr o jects whic h be long to the user.
Hidden hid es the pr oje ct from the Pro ject s ar ea. The
projec t wil l sti ll ap pear in the pro ject s lis t for the user bu t
will s how an ‘ H’ i n th e hi dden c olum n.
Not hid den unmar ks t he select ed proje ct as h idde n.
Delete d Sta te
Availa ble o nly fo r the p ro jects a nd the edit s whic h belong
to th e us er.
From P roje ct M gr: Del et ed de lete s t he proj ect a nd al l its
conten ts f rom t he Pr o jects area , but not fr om the
databa se. Th e proj ect wi ll stil l appe ar in th e proj ects li st
for t he u ser but will sh o w a “D ” in th e de lete d c olumn to
indica te it h as b een flag g ed as ‘to be dele ted’ .
From Edi t Mgr: De lete d delete s the ed it fr om t he Edit
area, bu t not fr om the da tabase . The ed it will s till appear
25
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Menu It em
Descri ption
in th e Ed its list but wil l s how a “D ” in t he d elet ed column
to in dica te i t ha s be en fla gged a s ‘ to b e de lete d’.
Not Dele ted u nmark s t he sel ecte d pro ject or edit a s
delet ed.
4.2.3
OPENING A PLAYER TO VIEW MEDIA
From th e Medi a Mgr, and Edit Mg r tab s, yo u can o pen any item on th e elem ent li s t
by dou ble- clic king it or ri ght-cl icki ng the m ouse an d sel ect Play (or Run P la yer).
The elem ent o pens i n a Player w indo w, whi ch is same as t he Pla yer a rea in the
Edit ta b. Fo r a de tail ed e xplana tio n, ref er to the s ectio n 6.2 ‘ Play er Are a’, on page
57:
26
•
A jog a nd med ia b ar an d a set o f tr anspo rt c ontr ols al low t he man ipul ati o n of
the e lemen t in th e win do w.
•
Using the mous e, y ou c a n cli ck wh erev er y ou wa n t ins ide m edia bar , an d d rag
the mo use to b rows e th ro ugh t he e lemen t.
•
Drag and dro p opera tion s of clips and me dia are possibl e from this P laye r to
the Cl ip a rea or M edia ar ea of the pro ject .
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
4.3
SEARCHING THE DATABASE
4.3.1
INTRODUCTION
When the dat abas e conta ins larg e amount s of dat a, it may becom e diff icul t to find
a spec ifi c el ement . Th e X edio S uit e of fers sev eral ways t o sp eed up y our se arch:
•
quick tex t se arch
•
filte rs o n pa ramet ers
By def aul t, t he c olumn s that are tak en i nto co nsider atio n f or t he Qu ic k Text
Search are the one s cu rr ently vis ible in the grid .
If you wi sh to s earc h in other c olumn s, an d view the str ing yo u are s earc hing fo r
in th e co lumns , yo u ca n:
•
add o ther col umns to t he elemen t li st v iew
•
use Fil ters , as ex plai ned in sect ion ‘E rror ! Refe r ence sou rce no t found .’ on
page E rror ! Boo kmark n ot def ined.
These sear ch t ools are e xplain ed in d etai l be low.
Quick te xt sear ch and filters o n param eter s, as well as seve ral fi lters on
parame ters , ca n be com b ined and save d fo r l ater use. All the cri teri a mus t be m et
in the resu lts l ist ( an ‘AN D’ oper ator is ap plie d). T hese Sa ved F ilte rs ca n t hen be
appli ed i n on e cl ick.
4.3.2
QUICK TEXT SEARCH
I NTRODUCTION
The Qu ick Text Se arch fiel d i s a lways ava ilab le on th e t op o f t he d atabas e
conten t l ist:
It al lows sear chin g fo r a string in the dis play ed c o lumns.
The Quic k Text Searc h o ption o beys s peci fic r ule s which c an be ac cess ed via the
Help b utto n
next to the Quick Text Sear ch f iel d.
For mor e de tail s on thes e rule s, r efer to t he s ecti on ‘Qu ick T ext Searc h R ules’ , o n
page 2 8.
H OW TO P ERFORM A Q UICK T EXT S EARCH
To per form a Q uick Text search , pr ocee d as fol low s:
1.
Show t he c olumn s yo u wi sh to per form a qu ick sea rch on .
2.
Type a se arch str ing in t he Qu ick Text Sea rch fi eld, base d o n Qu ick Tex t
search ru les av aila ble fr om the Help bu tton
and detail ed in sec tion
27
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
‘Quick Tex t Se arch Rule s ’ on page 28.
3.
Depend ing on wh ethe r th e AutoRe fresh F ilte ring setti ng is sel ecte d or no t,
you may have to pr ess t he Sear ch bu tton to ap p ly the Quick Text Sear ch .
Refer to the tab Softw are > Par amet er P rofi les > G eneral > G ener al.
The Q uick Tex t Se arch i s app lied an d t he s earc h resu lt is disp layed in th e
grid.
4.
To clear t he app lie d Quic k Text Sea rch, c lick t he r ed " X" icon to th e righ t o f
the s earch fi eld
5.
or sele ct <empt y> f rom the Q uick Text Sear ch f ield .
The Quic k Tex t Sear ch f ield is a comb o box t hat gives a cces s to th e las t 1 0
previo usly sea rche d st rin gs.
Select a f ilte r fr om th e list of t he Qu ick T ext Search fie ld t o ap ply a
previo us s earc h.
Q UICK T EXT S EARCH R ULES
The s tring th at y ou ente r in t he Q uick Tex t Se arc h fie ld i s an alyz ed accor ding to
the fol lowin g set of ru les , which can b e acces sed via the He lp butt on
the Qu ick Text Sea rch fi eld.
next to
The fr ee text sear ch is n ot a case sen siti ve o pera tion.
Search Str ing
Search Resu lt
Yellow car d
Search es for th e strin g s ‘yellow ’ and ‘ca rd’, even if in tw o
diffe rent f ield s (col umn s), for ex ampl e ‘yel low’ in Name and
‘card’ in Keyw ords .
For ex ampl e a clip name d ‘The Yel low Man’ with keywor ds ‘R ed
Card’ w ill be fo und, sin c e it h as ye llow and c ard in 2 d iffe rent
field s.
"Yellow card"
Search es f or s trin gs c ont ainin g ‘Y ellow car d’.
Yellow | ca rd
Search es f or ‘ yell ow’ or ‘car d’, even if in two diffe rent fie lds
(colum ns), for exam ple ‘y ellow’ in Name or ‘card ’ i n Keyw ords .
Spaces aro und the | si gn are m anda tory .
28
yell*
Search es f or ‘ yell ’ a t th e beginn ing of a st ring .
*low
Search es f or ‘ low’ at the end o f a stri ng.
Ye*low
Search es for str ings wit h ‘ye ’ a t the begi nnin g and ‘ low’ at th e
end.
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Search Str ing
Search Resu lt
Ye*low 123
Search es for str ings wit h ‘ye ’ a t the begi nnin g and ‘ low’ at th e
end an d wh ich cont ains ‘ 123’.
=card
Search es f or a str ing exa ctly equa ls t o ‘c ard’ .
For exam ple , if a fiel d co ntain s ‘ye llow c ard’ , th e =card c ondi tion
will n ot retur n a ny re sul t.
= ”yell ow c ard ”
Search es f or a str ing exa ctly equa ls t o ‘y ello w car d’.
The use of qu otes is req uired d ue to the s pace b etween ‘ yel low’
and ‘ card’ .
4.3.3
ADVANCED FILTERS
Filter s are ava ilab le for more deta iled s earch o pe ratio ns from th e Filte r 0 tab. The
parame ters avai labl e for filte ring oper atio ns ar e the co lumn head ings a nd any
metada ta a ssoc iate d by t he use r.
From t he T oday tab , th e f ilter ‘cr eati on d ate = to da y’ is aut omati cal ly a ppli e d.
F ILTER A CTIVATION
Show/Hide Filter Button
To dis play , or hid e, t he Filter ext ende d ar ea, cli ck the Show /Hide Fil ter butt on
over the grid .
Filter Butt on D ispla y
Meaning
(dimme d)
The S how/H ide Filt er b utton is dimm ed when all filt er
criter ia are h idde n. C ons equent ly, the fil ters are i nactiv e.
(red)
The Show /Hid e Fil ter butto n is r ed whe n th e filt er
extend ed ar ea is vi sib le, even if n o fil teri ng cri t erion i s
appli ed.
Filter Extended Area
The Fi lter ext ende d ar ea is as fol lows:
The firs t field u nder th e Show/Hid e Filte r but ton list s three o ptio ns for th e
combin atio n of cri teri a t o be t aken int o ac coun t du ring the filt erin g op erat io n.
29
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
The se cond fie ld is a fil te r fie ld a llow ing the user s to se lect a f irst fi lter par ameter .
Criteria Combination
The av aila ble opt ions are deta iled in the tab le b elo w:
Option
Meaning
ALL cr iter ia a re me t
All t he c rite ria sele cted in t he F ilte r fi elds di splaye d
under the Crit eria Comb i nation fie ld m ust be me t.
The medi a disp layed in the resul ts li st ful fill all the
select ed filt er c rite ria.
ANY cri teri a i s met
At lea st o ne o f th e cr ite ria se lect ed i n th e Fi lte r fie lds
must b e me t.
The me dia dis playe d i n t he re sult s l ist fulf ill at le ast o ne
of th e se lect ed f ilt er cr ite ria.
NO cri teri a is met
None o f t he cr ite ria sele c ted i n th e Fi lter fie lds di splaye d
under the Crit eria Comb i nation fie ld m ust be me t.
The me dia dis play ed i n t he re sult s l ist ful fill no n e of the
select ed filt er c rite ria.
Filter Fields
Under the Cr iter ia Com binati on fiel d, the use rs will be able to sel ect a s many
filte r para mete rs as t he y want an d to ch oose s pecif ic val ue(s ) for t hes e filte r
parame ters . Th e us e of F ilter fie lds is e xpla ined i n the nex t se ctio n.
30
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
F ILTER F IELDS
The Fi lter fie ld p rovi des the list of all the para m eters on w hich a s earc h can be
perfor med. Th e fol lowin g screen shot i s an exam ple of such a lis t. The o ptio ns ma y
diffe r betw een t he ap plic ation s of t he Xe dio Su it e. Most rele vant param et ers are
liste d at the to p of the li st, then , all th e other f iel ds are disp laye d in alph abeti ca l
order.
Once a par amet er h as b e en se lect ed, an e ntir e li n e is disp laye d.
Interf ace Eleme nt
Descri ption
1
Select ed filt er p arame ter.
2
Variou s f ield s u sed to e nter the fi lter cri teri a. Refer to
sectio n ‘S earc h Fi elds Ty pes’ on p age 32.
Used t o re move the corr e spondi ng filt er l ine.
Used t o ad d a new filt er l ine.
31
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
S EARCH F IELDS T YPES
Accord ing to the sel ecte d fi lter par amet er, dif fer ent t ypes of se arch fie ld s wil l b e
displa yed. The y ar e de tai led i n th e ta ble belo w.
Filter Par amete r
Type
Displa yed C rite ria Fiel d s
Timecod e or
Duratio n
Paramet er
Such a s TC IN,
TC OUT,
Durati on…
Select a l ogic al o pera to r in the firs t fi eld and then ente r a
timeco de o r du rati on v alu e in the seco nd f ield .
Range
Such a s
Timeco de Ra nge
Select a n opti on from t h e first fi eld an d then e nt er a timeco de
value . Thi s wi ll i nclu de , or exclu de, medi a co ntain ing the
specif ied time code val ue.
Date
Severa l Da te S earch fi lte rs exi st. They are des crib ed be low.
Such a s
Creati on D ate
a. Select a condi tio n or a l o gical oper ator in the fir st field
b. This w ill cond itio n t he n e xt st ep:
• Search bas ed on a sp eci fic d ate (e. g. w ith =…) : a cal enda r
will b e d ispla yed for the select ion of a da te.
32
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Filter Par amete r
Type
Issue 4.1.B
Displa yed C rite ria Fiel d s
• Search bas ed o n an int er val (e .g. with […] (bet we en)…): two
calend ars are disp laye d f or th e se lect ion of t wo d a tes.
• Search ba sed on a sp eci fic date c alcu late d from t he curre nt
date ( e.g. with tomo rro w, las t mont h,…): no other fiel d
appear s.
Time
Severa l Da te S earch fi lte rs exi st. They are des crib ed be low.
Such a s La st
Render ed Da te
Time
a. Select a condi tio n or a l o gical oper ator in the fir st field
b. This w ill cond itio n t he n e xt st ep:
• Search ba sed on a spec if ic date and ti me (e.g . wit h =…): two
addit iona l field s will b e display ed, a cale nd ar for the
select ion of a dat e and drop-d own lis t for the s elect ion of
time.
• Search based on a s pe cific d ate a nd ti me cal c ulate d from
the c urren t d ate and time ( e.g. wit h ne xt hour, last
month,…) : n o ot her fiel d appear s.
33
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Filter Par amete r
Type
Displa yed C rite ria Fiel d s
Number
Such a s DB Id
Select a l ogic al o pera to r in the firs t fi eld and then ente r a
number in the seco nd f iel d.
Note
<> mea ns ‘ diff ers from ’
Option List
Select a condi tio n in the first fie ld
Such a s Vi deo
Standa rd
Click th e
butto n to dis pl ay the lis t of op tion s avai lable f or
the s elec ted filt er p arame ter.
Exampl e fo r th e Vi deo St andard :
Select an opt ion from the list .
Boolean
Select Yes or No f rom th e sin gle crit eria fie ld
Such a s
Publis hed
Free T ext
Such a s La bel
Select a c ondi tio n in the first fi eld an d then e nte r text in t he
second fi eld.
34
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
H OW TO P ERFORM A S EARCH THROUGH F ILTER F IELDS
To ent er s earc h va lues in the Filt er f ield s, p roce ed as f ollow s:
1.
2.
Choose the col umns you wish t o pe rfor m a searc h on.
Click the Show/ Hide Fil t er bu tton
The fo llow ing Filt er a rea is di spla yed:
3.
Select a crit eria comb inat ion f rom t he list :
4.
Select a filt er p arame ter from t he f ilt er p arame ter list.
An ent ire lin e, c orres pon ding to t he s elec ted fil ter param eter , is dis play ed:
5.
Enter filt er c rite ria a s e xplain ed i n sec tio n ‘Se a rch Fi elds Type s’ on pa ge
32.
For fr ee t ext fie lds, pre ss ENTER to a pply the fi lte r.
Otherw ise, the res ults lis t is autom ati call y res tric t ed.
6.
4.3.4
If re quir ed, clic k th e
butt on to add a f ilte r pa rame t er.
USING SAVED FILTERS
Once you ha ve def ined a filter cr iter ion, y ou may want to sav e it for la ter u se. You
will then be able to appl y the same fil ter w ith a s in gle c lick .
Right- clic king in th e Filt er 0 tab displ ays a con textu al menu wit h the f ollowi ng
optio ns:
35
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Menu Op tion
Descri ption
Create New Filt er
Allows to crea te a new fil ter t ab.
Save F ilte r As
Allows to cre ate a new filte r tab in whi ch th e curren t
search fi lter will be save d.
Filter Pro perti es
Allows to ch ange the name an d/or descr ipt ion of the
select ed filt er t ab.
Reset Filt er
Removes all sea rch crit er ia on the sel ecte d fi lter t ab.
Delete Fil ter
Removes the fi lter tab .
H OW TO S AVE F ILTERS
To sav e fi lte rs, proce ed a s fol lows:
1.
Define the fi lter or filt ers combin atio n yo u wi sh t o save, as expla ined abo ve .
2.
Right- clic k th e Fi lter 0 ta b.
3.
Select Sav e Fi lter As fro m the cont extu al m enu.
The Fi lter Edi t Di alog box opens .
4.
Enter a labe l f or t he tab you are goi ng to crea te and, if re quir ed, ent er a
descri ptio n.
5.
Click OK t o co nfirm .
The ne w fi lter tab is dis pl ayed o n t he l eft of the lis t.
H OW TO A PPLY A S AVED F ILTER
To app ly a sav ed f ilt er, si mply c lick the cor resp ond ing t ab.
36
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
5. Managing Projects
and Project Elements
5.1
PROJECT AREA
5.1.1
OVERVIEW
The Proj ect ar ea is l oc ated on t he le ft par t of the main
CleanE dit w indo w. I ts f uncti on is to perm it t h e user to
manage a proj ect and al l th e el emen ts w ith in th e pro ject s,
multip le edi ts, medi a us ed within t he proj ect an d clips and
media used on the time li ne of edi ts w ithi n th e pr oj ect .
The Proj ect ar ea con t ains th e proj ects cr eat ed by the
logged -on edit or. T he P r oject area is d ivid ed i nto four zones
to so rt t he d iffe rent el em ents of e ach proj ect:
• The Pr ojec t zo ne c onta i ns a list of the pro ject s for the
logged on us er. The op en pr ojec t i s di spla yed in bold
charac ters .
• The Me dia zon e co nta ins the ori gina l me dia fil es that are
used in t he o pen proj ect.
• The Edi t zone cont ains the lis t of e dits that ha ve been
create d on t he op en pro j ect. Th e edi t loa ded i s d isplay ed
in bo ld c harac ters .
• The Cli p zone cont ains l ist of c lips stor ed in pre parat ion
for t he e dit.
Each pro ject o nly co nta ins the el emen ts tha t have bee n
deemed to be relev ant t o it. The abi lit y to acc es s elem ents
from any where in the dat abase o f an in stal lati on a nd decl are
them re leva nt to a pr oject , to al low s harin g of medi a
amongs t sev eral work sta tions , is a fun dame ntal part o f th e
struct ure of C lean Edit .
37
Issue 4.1.B
5.1.2
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
HIDING AND DISPLAYING THE PROJECT AREA
The pro ject are a can be hidden or d ispl ayed usin g the A uto Hi de ic on
top r ight cor ner of t he P r oject are a.
on th e
When the Auto Hi de ico n is horizo ntal
, the Auto Hide is on: the Pr ojec t are a
is col laps ed t o a t hin v er tical bar and o nly opens when t he mo use i s pl ace d onto
the b ar.
When t he Aut o Hid e ic o n is v erti cal
open in i ts m inimum wid t h.
, th e Aut o H ide is off : Th e Pro ject ar ea is
If yo u wa nt to e xten d it , move the mou se t o t he border be tween th e Pr oj ect a rea
and Wo rk a rea and left -cl ick t he mo use when the mouse curs or ch ange s to
.
If you wan t to ext end it t o the whole w indow , so that yo u can see i nfor ma tion on
the proj ects , media , edit s and clips , move th e mouse to th e borde r betw een th e
Projec t a rea and Work area and righ t-cl ick the mouse whe n t he m ous e cur sor
change s to
.
To ret urn t o th e nor mal displa y, p lace the mouse over the r ight han d edg e of t h e
window t o see t he mous e pointe r chan ge and d rag the fram e to th e desi red size or
click with the ri ght m ouse butt on o n it .
5.1.3
SELECTING ITEMS IN THE ZONES OF THE PROJECT AREA
The sel ecti on of i tems in the var ious zones of th e Projec t are a is do ne in t h e same
way as in W indo ws® E xpl orer:
38
•
Click on a n i tem f or a sin gle s elec tion
•
Press
conti guous it ems.
•
Press
+ click on t he f irst an d last i tem fo r a select ion of
multip le c onti guou s i tems .
+ c lick on the items for a s elec tion of mu ltip le n on-
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
5.2
PROJECT ZONE
5.2.1
INTRODUCTION
Issue 4.1.B
Each time us ers begi n t o edi t a new bo dy of m at erial , t hey need t o cr eat e a new
projec t in w hich they w il l store all the e lemen ts to be us ed in that proj e ct. The
projec ts a re c reat ed a nd displa yed in the Proj ect z one.
This ar ea wil l sho w all projec ts cr eate d by t he user th at ha s log ged i n. Other
user’s pro ject s ca n on ly be sh own in t his area i f the y ha ve be en i mpor t ed. Fo r
more info rmat ion on imp ortin g a projec t, refe r to the sectio n 5.2.6 ‘I mpo rting a
Projec t’, on page 42.
This se ctio n pre sent s th e vario us po ssib le ac tio n s on a p roje ct, e ithe r ac cessib le
from t he P roje ct c onte xtu al men u or in anot her wa y.
5.2.2
OPENING AN EXISTING PROJECT
To open an exis ting p roj ect, do uble -cli ck its n am e in the Pr ojec t zone l ist . When
the pro ject o pens, the di f feren t eleme nts as soci at ed to the p roje ct are d isp layed in
the Me dia, Edi t, and C lip zones of the Proj ect area .
The na me o f an act ive (o pen) p roje ct is d ispl ayed in bo ld c harac ters .
5.2.3
PROJECT CONTEXTUAL MENU
You can per form th e mai n action s on a proje ct vi a the Proje ct con text ual menu.
You wi ll a cces s it by righ t-cli cking on a p roje ct i n t he Pro ject zon e:
39
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
The fo llow ing tab le s ho ws an over view on the comman ds from the co ntext ual
menu:
Command
Descri ption
New
Opens the N ew Pr ojec t dialo g box in w hich you can c reat e a
new proj ect . See a lso the sec tion 5 .2. 4 ‘Cr eatin g a New
Projec t’, on page 41.
Proper ties
Opens the P roje ct Pr op erties dia log box f rom which y ou c an
change the pro jec t nam e (label ) or des crip tion .
The video s tand ard can not be chan ged onc e th e pro jec t has
been c reat ed.
Delete
Delete s th e pro ject from the Pr ojec t zon e. A dial o g box w ill a sk
for c onfi rmati on.
The proje ct will be de lete d from the user ’s Proj ect zone, bu t not
from t he da tab ase ( it w ill be mark ed ‘ DELET ED ’). I t can be
restor ed in t he P roje ct Manag er tab, by righ t-cli cking th e
projec t r ow a nd sele cti ng Not De leted fr om t he co ntex tual
menu.
Hide
Hides t he pro ject from th e Proje ct zo ne. Th is is us eful wh en to o
many proj ects a re dis played . A dial og box will ask for
confir mati on.
The pro ject w ill b e hid de n from t he use r’s p roje ct zone, b ut is
still a vail able i n the d ata base (i t will b e marke d ‘ HIDDEN’) . You
can dis play b ack a hi dde n proje ct via the Pr ojec t Manage r tab,
by righ t-cl icki ng the p roj ect row an d sel ecti ng No t Hidden f rom
the c onte xtua l men u.
40
Defaul t So rt
Allows the user to se le ct how the p roje cts are sorte d in the
Projec t zone am ong v arious s orti ng opt ions . Each sort ing
optio n ca n be comb ined with a n as cend ing or d es cendin g so rt:
Refres h
Refres hes the li st of p roject s in the Proj ect z one. This is
releva nt w hen proj ects ar e crea ted auto mati call y b y the syst em
or by oth er us ers.
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
5.2.4
Issue 4.1.B
CREATING A NEW PROJECT
Procedure
You can cr eate a new projec t via t he New c o mmand in t he Pro ject c ontex tual
menu. This ope ns t he N ew Pro ject dia log box in which you def ine and s ave t he
projec t chara cter isti cs. Y ou need to spec ify a proj ect name and vi deo sta n dard to
be used in yo ur pr ojec t, then c lick O K to v alid ate . The pr ojec t cha ract eris tics ar e
record ed i n th e d atab ase.
Project Default Values
By def aul t, t he f ollo wing values are use d:
•
Projec t name : Pro jec t_ XXXX whe re XX XX co rr espond s to an i ncrem e nted
number .
The de faul t nam e can b e chan ged i n Xed io Ma n ager, Softw are > Par am eter
Profil es tool , in the Brow ser t ab.
•
Video S tanda rd: at f irst use, the disp layed def ault v alue is the o ne s e t in
Xedio Ma nage r. Aft erwar ds, it wi ll cor resp ond to t he last v alue s elec ted b y the
user.
Project Video Standard
The video st anda rd spec ifies th e resol utio n and freque ncy tha t will be u sed fo r
playin g o ut or rend erin g the p roje ct. Onc e a pro je ct is cr eate d, you can not modi fy
the v ideo sta ndar d.
The de faul t val ue f or t he pro ject vide o st anda rd is s et i n Xed io Ma n ager i n
Softwa re > Par amete r Pr ofile s > Gene ral > Ge ner al tab: D efaul t Vide o St andard
field .
In a pro ject yo u ca nnot a dd me dia with a fre quenc y dif fere nt from the pr oje ct vi de o
standa rd.
But you can a dd med ia having any v ideo stan da rd, the y wil l be co nver te d to the
projec t v ideo sta ndard .
41
Issue 4.1.B
5.2.5
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
VIEWING THE PROJECT DATA
By movin g the mou se be tween th e proj ect an d th e work are as, th e mouse pointe r
will cha nge to
. Click ing with the ri ght mo use b utton wi ll exp and t he Pr oject
area f ull s cree n, s o tha t you ca n vi ew in forma tio n on t he pr ojec ts, m edia , edit s
and c lips .
To ret urn t o th e nor mal displa y, p lace the mouse over the r ight han d edg e of t h e
window t o see t he mous e pointe r chan ge and d rag the fram e to th e desi red size or
click with the ri ght m ouse butt on o n it .
5.2.6
IMPORTING A PROJECT
If y ou n eed to work on a nother us er’s pr ojec t, yo u can im port it fr om t he Projec t
Mgr ar ea.
To im port a proj ect , se le ct t he proje ct in the Pro j ect list of th e Pr ojec t M gr ar ea
and drop it t o the Pro jec t zone. The pr ojec t will be copie d and impo rted to your
workin g en viro nment , wi t h all the ass ocia ted medi a and edi ts.
In som e s peci fic work flo ws, t he u sers wil l be ask ed whe ther th ey w ant to copy th e
projec t, or becom e t he p r oject ’s o wner . In th e l atte r cas e, the user wil l wo rk on the
origin al proj ect.
42
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
5.3
MEDIA ZONE
5.3.1
INTRODUCTION
Issue 4.1.B
The Medi a zon e cont ains the lis t of me dia r elat in g to the proj ect. E ach m edia is
placed in thi s ar ea b y drag ging it from the Media Mana ger tab. Fo r more
inform atio n on th is t ab, r efer to t he s ecti on 4 ‘Se a rching for an d Man agin g Media’ ,
on pag e 2 4.
This sect ion pres ents th e var ious pos sibl e ac tio ns on a m edia , e ithe r ac cessib l e
from t he M edia con text ua l menu or in a noth er w ay.
5.3.2
OPENING MEDIA IN THE PLAYER AREA
To view mat eria l avail abl e in the Medi a zone , you can load it t o the Pla yer of the
Edit tab , by click ing the media name or by dra g ging the med ia ont o the Player
window :
43
Issue 4.1.B
5.3.3
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
MEDIA CONTEXTUAL MENU
You can p erfo rm the ma i n actio ns on me dia vi a t he Media cont extu al men u. You
will a cces s it by righ t-cl ic king on a medi a in th e M edia zone :
The fo llow ing tab le s ho ws an over view on the comman ds from the co ntext ual
menu:
Command
Descri ption
Delete
Delete s the medi a from t he Media zon e. A d ialo g box wil l a sk
for c onfi rmati on.
The medi a wil l be de lete d from th e use r’s Me dia zone, b ut no t
from the data base no r fr o m the med ia s erve r. Y ou will stil l v iew
it in the Med ia Mana ger t ab and be abl e to drag i t to the Media
zone.
44
Defaul t So rt
Allows the use r to sel ect how t he m edia is sort ed in t he Me dia
zone amon g vario us sort i ng optio ns. Eac h sorti ng optio n can be
combin ed wi th an a scen d ing o r de scend ing sort :
Refres h
Refres hes the list of med ia in the Med ia z one
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
5.4
EDIT ZONE
5.4.1
INTRODUCTION
Issue 4.1.B
An edit i s video a nd aud i o materi al ass emble d in a timeli ne, t o which e ffe cts and
severa l feat ures may ha ve been add ed, and th a t will be play ed out as a final
subjec t.
The Ed it z one cont ains th e lis t of edi ts r ela ted to t he cur rent pro ject .
The ed its will be disp laye d dif fere ntly dep endi ng o n the ir s tatu s:
•
An ope n ed it is i n bo ld c h aracte rs.
•
A clos ed e dit is disp laye d in n ormal cha ract ers.
•
An ed it c lose d a nd s et as ‘ Read y to br oadc a st’ i s d ispl ayed in dim med
charac ters .
This sect ion pre sent s t he vari ous pos sibl e a ctio ns on an ed it, ei ther acc essi ble
from t he E dit cont extu al menu, or i n an othe r wa y.
5.4.2
OPENING AN EXISTING EDIT
To ope n an exi stin g e dit, double -cli ck o n i ts n ame i n the Edi t zo ne.
When an e dit i s acti ve ( open), its n ame is h ighl i ghted i n bol d char acte rs and the
Timeli ne a rea shows the edit. The time lin e ic ons a lso b ecome act ive.
5.4.3
EDIT CONTEXTUAL MENU
You ca n ma nage your ed i ts vi a th e Ed it c onte xtua l menu.
If yo u r ight cli ck on t he Edit zon e, the con text ual me nu shows th e co mmand s
applic able to all edi ts.
If you righ t cl ick o n a s p ecifi c edi t in the Edit zon e, the con text ual m enu w ill al so
enable th e com mands ap plicab le to t he e dit .
45
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
The fo llow ing tab le s ho ws an over view on the comman ds from the co ntext ual
menu:
Command
Descri ption
New
Opens the Ne w Edit win d ow, from whe re you can create a new
edit.
For mor e in forma tio n on the f ield s av aila ble in this w indow ,
refer to the sect ion 5.4. 4 ‘Creat ing an E dit’ , o n pa g e 47.
Proper ties
Opens th e Edi t Prop erti e s window , from wh ere yo u can modi fy
some p rope rtie s of the ed it.
See al so the sect ion 5.4. 4 ‘Cre atin g an Edi t’, on p age 47 .
Delete
Delete s th e ed it f rom th e Edit zon e. A dia log bo x will ask for
confir mati on. Edi ts w hi ch ha ve the R2B sta t us (r eady to
broadc ast) can not be d el eted.
The ed it w ill b e de lete d f rom th e use r’s Edit zon e, but n ot f rom
the dat abas e. It c an be restor ed in t he Edi t Man ager ta b, by
right- clic king th e ed it ro w and sel ecti ng N ot D el eted from the
contex tua l men u.
Duplic ate
Allows cre atin g a dupl ica te of the sel ecte d ed it.
See al so the sect ion 5.4. 5 ‘Dup lica ting an Edi t’, o n page 50 .
46
Defaul t So rt
Allows th e user to se lec t how the edit s are sort ed in the Edit
zone amon g vario us sort i ng optio ns. Eac h sorti ng optio n can be
combin ed wi th an a scen d ing o r de scend ing sort :
Make L ocal
(XT/XS)
Allows th e u ser to arch iv e al l XT /XS cli ps u sed in the e dit to hi s
local st orag e. Whe n thi s option i s selec ted, a confirma tio n
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Command
Issue 4.1.B
Descri ption
(YES/NO ) in fo w indow is disp layed .
This op tion i s ava ilab le only if the pa rame ter Al l ow to Back up
XT/XS cli p is set to tr ue in Xedio Man ager (i n Softwar e >
Parame ter P rofi les > Cl e anEdit > C emed iaimp ort) .
Refres h
5.4.4
Refres hes the list of edi t s in the Edit zon e.
CREATING AN EDIT
C REATION P ROCEDURE
To cre ate a ne w ed it i n a n open pro jec t, p roce ed a s fol lows:
1. Right- clic k in the Edi t zo ne and se lect New from t he con tex tual menu .
This o pens the New Edi t window .
2. Fill in t he f ield s in th is wi ndow.
3. Click OK.
The ne w ed it w ill be c rea ted wi th the labe l an d ch aracte rist ics you have
defin ed. Its char acte rist ic s are stor ed in t he d atab ase.
N EW E DIT W INDOW
You ne ed to s peci fy t he edit char acte rist ics w hen you crea te t he e dit , vi a the Ne w
Edit w indo w. Y ou wi ll find below a d escr ipti on o f i t s fie lds.
The ma ndat ory fiel ds ar e fil led in w ith def ault v alues . Th e va lues of so me fie lds
can stil l be modif ied w hen the edi t has bee n create d, in the Ed it Pr opert ies
window . Thi s i s sp ecif ied in t he f ield des crip tion .
47
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
General Tab
The f ollo wing ta ble desc r ibes the gen eral ch arac te risti cs t hat can be de fine d on an
Edit.
Field
Descri ption
Label (man dato ry)
Name assi gned t o the ed it. The de faul t valu e for the labe l is
Edit_X XX wh ere XXX corr espond s to an incr emen t ed num ber.
The def ault n ame ca n be change d in Xe dio Ma nag er, Sof tware
> Para mete r Pro fil es t ool , in the Brows er t ab.
Descri ptio n
Option al text to desc ribe the e dit.
Program Cla ssLi st
Catego ry as sign ed t o th e edit . Th e va lue i s se lecte d fro m
predef ined cl asse s to classi fy an edit as be lo nging to a
partic ular gr oup or edit type. The tr ee v alue s a nd st ruct ure
are def ined i n Too ls > P rogram C lass Ma nage r t ool, in Xedio
Manage r.
Click the dow n a rrow to disp lay the cl assi fica ti on tr ee and
select th e re ques ted cate gory.
Edit ID
48
Ident ifie r for th e edit can be ente red or generat ed
automa tica lly to mak e it unique . If it is ent ered m anual ly and
it is a lread y use d, a warnin g mess age wi ll appear . Two
parame ters Soft ware > P aramet er Pr ofil es > (Xed i o) Clea nEdi t
> Genera l tab in X ed io Manag er (Rea d Onl y Edit ID,
Automa tic E dit I D Gene r ation ) make it po ssib le t o conf igure
how th e Ed it ID fi eld will be use d
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Field
Descri ption
Aspect rat io
Defaul t as pect rat io to b e used for the edi t.
Issue 4.1.B
With HD vid eo stan dard s, the asp ect ra tio 16 :9 is select ed
and c anno t be mod ifie d in X edio Cle anEd it. Th is do es n ot
preven t from usi ng a med ia with a diff eren t aspec t ratio in the
edit.
With SD vide o stand ard s, you can cho ose the aspect ra tio
betwee n 4:3 an d 16:9 , a nd you can mo dify t his a s long as th e
edit is em pty .
The def ault valu e is sp e cifie d in th e Sof tware p aramet ers >
Genera l > Gene ral tab in Xedio Mana ger.
Defaul t co nver sion
type
When a conv ersi on is p erform ed on th e media , this set ting
allows t he use r to def i ne a prefe rred d efau lt from eit her
lette rbox 1 or pil larb ox 2/cro pped ( pan & sc an 3).
Audio type
Specif ies the aud io t ype f or th e ed it.
Possib le v alue s: All Ster eo, O ne 5 .1 + 5x ste reo, Two 5. 1 + 2x
stereo . By de faul t, A ll S t ereo is se lec ted.
In case the Sh ow Aud io Matrix B utto n is no t en abled i n the
Parame ter Pro file s of X edio Man ager , All Ste re o will be th e
single op tion ava ilab le.
Start TimeC ode
Specif ies the fir st t imec o de fo r th e ed it.
The en tere d t imeco de i s:
• reflec ted on the time code bar above th e tim eli ne,
• stored in the dat abas e,
• used for the play out and render ing proc ess.
From Fi rst Clip
If thi s ch eck b ox is tic ked, t he st art timec ode for th e ed it
timeli ne wil l be the t imec ode of th e firs t vide o fra me inser ted
in the timel ine . In thi s case, you can not e nter a Start
Timeco de ma nual ly a s th i s fie ld w ill be d isab led.
On Air Dat e an d
On Air Time
Allows s peci fyin g a date and time wh en the e dit i s planne d to
be playe d out. Th e au tomati c rest ore pro cess uses this
inform atio n wh en t he a rc hive s olu tion is part of th e syst em.
The letterbox effect occurs when film shot in a widescreen aspect ratio is transferred to standard-width video formats while
preserving the film's original aspect ratio. The resulting image has black bars (mattes) above and below it.
2 The pillarbox effect occurs in widescreen video displays when black bars (mattes or masking) are placed on the sides of
the image. It becomes necessary when film or video was not originally designed for a widescreen display.
3 Pan and scan is a method of adjusting widescreen film images so that they can be shown within the proportions of a
standard definition 4:3 aspect ratio television screen, often cropping off the sides of the original widescreen image to focus
on the composition's most important aspects. (Source: wikipedia)
1
49
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Custom Metadata
If only a de faul t metad at a profil e is def ined f or e dits, t he meta data f ield s of the
defau lt p rofi le a re d ispl ay ed in thi s ta b an d ca n be fille d in .
If se veral met adat a pr of iles a re a ssoc iate d to t he edi ts in Xe dio Mana ger (o ne
defau lt p rofi le a nd o ne o r more ass ocia ted prof il es), y ou firs t ne ed t o se lect th e
reques ted p rofi le in the f irst ro w of t he ta ble. T he n, the m etad ata f ield s lin ked t o
the se lect ed pr ofi le wi ll b e disp laye d in the r ows b elow an d yo u wil l be abl e to f il l
in th e me tada ta f ield s.
5.4.5
DUPLICATING AN EDIT
You ca n dup lica te o ne of you r ed its u sing the Duplic ate c omman d in t he Edi t
contex tua l menu. T his o p ens a dia log bo x show ing the prop erti es of t he dup licat ed
edit a nd su gges ting a name (t he ol d nam e wi th the exte nsio n ‘_D upli cated ’).
Confirm th e op erat ion w it h the OK b utto n.
You ca n a lso use the foll owing keyb oard sho rtcu t
duplic ate for the edi t t hat is c urren tly loa ded in t he timel ine .
+
to cr eate a
Note
When you dup lica te an e dit, it is no t possi ble to c hange th e audio ty pe
of th e du plic ated edi t.
50
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
5.4.6
Issue 4.1.B
COPYING AN EDIT
You can als o copy an e dit from th e Edit Ma nag er tab, wha teve r the us er who
create d the edit . The r es ult is t he sam e as d upli c ating a n edi t, bu t you p er form th e
actio n in a d iffe rent way , and yo u ca n co py o ther u ser’s edi ts.
If you wa nt to c opy a n ed it avai labl e in th e Edi t M anager tab, s elec t the ed it, dra g
it fr om t he Ed it M anag er t ab and dro p i t on to:
•
the Ed it zone of the Proj e ct ar ea.
In th is c ase, the edi t i s a dded to t he o pen proj ect.
•
any pr ojec t na me i n th e P roject zon e o f th e Pr ojec t area .
In this c ase, it wil l be a dded to t he pro ject on which yo u have d ropp ed the
edit.
51
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
5.5
CLIP ZONE
5.5.1
INTRODUCTION
The Cl ip z one is m ainl y u sed t o st ore clip s in pre p arati on f or e dits .
It co ntai ns t he l ist of clip s made in one of the foll o wing w ays:
•
by sel ecti ng se ctio ns o f materi al fr om th e Pl ayer on the Edit tab and drag ging
them t o t he t imel ine.
•
by selec tin g sect ions o f materi al fro m the Pl ayer of the Me dia Man ager t ab and
draggi ng them to the time line.
•
by dragg ing th e clip s fro m the Media I mpor ter, EV S Server t ab dire ctly i nto the
Clip z one.
The cl ips show n ar e al l r elevan t t o th e pr ojec t op e n in the Proj ect zone .
Note:
For more i nform ati on on making c lips a nd pl acin g them on th e time line
or in the Cl ip zon e, ref e r to the sec tio ns 7.3 ‘P l acing Cl ips on to the
Timeli ne’, on page 107 .
5.5.2
VIEWING CLIPS
To vie w th e cl ip m ater ial, you can load the cli p on t o the Pla yer of t he E dit t ab:
52
•
by dou ble- clic king the cl i p name
•
by dra ggin g t he c lip nam e ont o th e Pl ayer wind ow
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
5.5.3
Issue 4.1.B
ADDING CLIPS
You ca n ad d cl ips to the clip zone in sever al w ays :
•
Drag the medi a f rom the Player to th e Cl ip zone . The ma teri al def ined bet ween
the IN a nd OUT poi nts, o r mark IN and m ark OU T point s when defi ned, will be
added to the C lip zon e.
•
Drag a med ia f rom t he M edia M gr i nto the Clip zo ne.
•
Select se veral cl ips in th e edi t f rom diff eren t t ime line trac ks a nd drop the m in
the c lip bin: thi s wi ll c rea te on ly o ne c lip.
This act ion is p ossib le o nly if the s elec ted vi deo and audio e dit cl ips acc ess
the s ame m edia with th e same t imeco des.
5.5.4
CLIP CONTEXTUAL MENU
You ca n ma nage your cl i ps via th e Cl ips c onte xtu al men u.
If you r igh t cli ck on the Clips z one, the c onte xt ual men u show s the co mmands
applic able to all cli ps.
If you ri ght c lick o n a sp ecifi c clip in the C lips z o ne, the c onte xtua l menu will al so
enable th e com mands ap plicab le to t he c lip.
Command
Descri ption
Proper ties
Opens t he Cli ps Pro pert i es wind ow, fr om wher e y ou can mo dify
the cl ip lab el an d des cri ption a nd ge t inf orma tion on othe r cli p
parame ters :
53
Issue 4.1.B
5.5.5
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Command
Descri ption
Delete
Delete s the c lip f rom th e Clip zo ne. A dial og bo x will as k for
confir mati on. T he ori gi nal med ia is n ot de le ted fro m the
databa se. Onc e de lete d, a cl ip cann ot b e re co vered as the
edits can be.
Thumbna ils
Allows the u ser t o di spla y or hi de th e cli p th umb nails showi ng
the IN and OUT fram es i n the C lip zone .
Print
Opens a dia log to pr int t he clip de tail s. If the wo rkstat ion ha s
been s et up a nd c onne ct ed to a p rint er, a li st can be pr inte d.
Refres h
Refres hes the list of cli ps in t he C lip zone .
Defaul t So rt
Allows the use r to sel ec t how the clip s ar e so rt ed in the Clip
zone amon g vario us sort i ng optio ns. Eac h sorti ng optio n can be
combin ed wi th an a scen d ing o r de scend ing sort :
ASSIGNING COLORS TO CLIPS AND FILTERING ON COLORS
Above the c lip lis t, the C olored Squ are ico n
and the Filter ic on
to as sign col ors to t he c li ps and fi lter the m ba sed on th e cl ip c olor s.
H OW TO A SSIGN A C OLOR TO N EW C LIPS
To act ivat e a col or t o be assign ed to c lips , pr ocee d as foll ows:
1. Click the Color ed S quar e ico n to ope n th e Co lor dialo g bo x.
2. Select a color you wan t t o assi gn to n ew cl ips and clic k OK.
54
allow yo u
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
The Co lored Squa re i con will chan ge to t he s elec t ed co lor
From then o nward s, the bulle t in fron t of the ne w clips pl aced i n the Cli p z one will
inheri t t he a ctiv e co lor.
H OW TO C HANGE THE C OLOR A SSIGNED TO E XISTING C LIPS
To cha nge the colo r as si gned to c lips , pr ocee d as foll ows:
1. Activa te the c olor you w ant t o ass ign usin g t he Colored Squa re i con an d the
Color dial og b ox.
2. Select th e cl ips for w hich you w ant to chang e t he color.
3. Simult aneo usly pre ss CT RL and cli ck t he Co lore d Squar e ic on.
The ac tive col or w ill be a ssigne d t o th e se lect ed c l ips.
H OW TO F ILTER C LIPS B ASED ON C OLORS
To fi lter cli ps t o wh ich a given colo r is ass igne d, p roceed as fol lows:
1. Activa te t he co lor o n wh ich to fil ter u sing the C olored Squar e ico n an d the
Color dial og b ox.
2. Click the Filt er i con to ac tivat e th e fi lter
The fi lter icon wil l tur n orange
and the clip lis t will be l imit ed to the clips
corres pond ing to t he s ele cted color .
55
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
6. Main Workspace for
Editing
6.1
EDIT TAB OVERVIEW
The Ed it t ab i s th e mai n worksp ace for worki ng and f inal izin g an edit . Cl ips an d
edits ar e crea ted in t h is tab. I t consi sts of f our area s, hig hlig hted in the
screen shot bel ow:
56
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Area Nu mber
Area Na me
1.
Player are a
Issue 4.1.B
See se ctio n 6 .2 ‘ Playe r A rea’ on p age 57.
2.
Audio Mete rs a rea and Tr im are a
See se ctio n 6 .4 ‘ Audi o M eters / Tr im A rea’ on pag e 81.
3.
Record er ar ea
See se ctio n 6 .3 ‘R ecor de r Area ’ on pag e 75 .
4.
Timeli ne a rea
See se ctio n 6 .5 ‘T imel ine Area’ on page 83 .
6.2
PLAYER AREA
6.2.1
OVERVIEW
The Pl ayer is u sed to lo a d and brows e med ia o n t he Edi t ta b, c reat e cl ips t o plac e
onto th e timel ine or t o dr ag to the cl ip lis t area . All type s of med ia and cl ips ca n
be pl ayed in the Play er: v ideo, aud io o r st ills .
The sc reen shot bel ow h ig hligh ts t he v ario us z ones in t he P laye r:
57
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
The fo llow ing tabl e br ief ly des crib es t he v ario us zones on the Play er a r ea and
refers to the sec tion wher e the fie lds are deta iled .
Area
1.
Descri ption
Video
Displa y
It di spla ys t he v ideo mat erial loa ded on t he P laye r.
Parame ters rela ted t o the di spla y are avai lab le via a
contex tua l men u.
See also th e secti on 6 .2.4 ‘Ad just ing the Pl ay er Video
Displa y’ o n pa ge 5 9.
2.
3.
Track
Select ion
Buttons
They al low th e use r to select the t rack s to b e t aken in to
accoun t wh en t he l oade d materi al i s ad ded to the t imelin e.
Jog and
Media B ar
They all ow the u ser to n aviga te in th e load ed m ateri al, to
place IN , OUT and n owli ne poin ts, as we ll as t o modify t h e
playba ck s peed of the ma teria l.
See also th e sect ion 6 .2.8 ‘Se lect ing th e Trac ks to be
Added to the T imel ine’ , o n page 68 .
See al so t he s ecti ons ‘ Jo g’, ‘M edia Bar ’ and ‘Now l ine, M ark
IN and Mar k OUT ’ fr om p age 64 .
4.
Clip C reat ion
Fields
They a re used to crea t e new cli ps, and get t he ex act
timeco de o f th e n owlin e, IN and OUT poin ts.
See also t he sec tion 6 .2. 7 ‘Creat ing an d Worki ng with Cli ps
in th e Pl ayer ’, o n pa ge 6 5.
5.
Log But tons
The lo gs ma ke i t pos sibl e to a dd re fere nce poin ts to ea sily
ident ify posi tion s of in ter est i n th e lo aded med ia.
See al so t he s ecti on 6 .2.9 ‘Add ing L ogs to t he Med i a
Loaded on the Play er A re a’, o n pa ge 7 2.
6.
7.
Transpo rt
Control
Buttons
Server
Recorde r
Select ion
They a re u sed to p lay ba ck th e lo aded medi a.
See al so the sect ion ‘Tra nsport Con trol s’, on p age 61.
The
butt on a cts as a to g gle sw itch be tween th e T rack
Select ion bu tto ns
and t he c amera sel ecti on list
Severa l ca ses can occu r:
• If a re cord trai n of a n E VS Vide o Serv er is load ed, th is
allows the u ser to load a nother reco rd tr ain o n th e given
server .
• If a cli p b elon ging to a group of lin ked cli ps i s loaded
(for e xampl e, cl ips cre ated wi th g ange d cha n nels i n
IPDire ctor ), the list disp lays th e var ious c amera angles
and all ows the u ser to select a clip l inke d to t he one
58
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Area
Descri ption
loaded .
• If an ind ivid ual cl ip is lo aded, o nly it s recor der c hannel
is ava ila ble.
If a med ia in gest ed fr o m an enco der i s loa ded, the
butto n is not ava ilab le.
You can ac cess t he var io us comman ds of th e Play er area, e ith er usin g the butto ns
on the u ser in terf ace, o r dedic ated k eybo ard s h ortcu ts (whi ch ar e assi g ned in
Xedio Mana ger) .
6.2.2
ACTIVATING THE PLAYER AREA
To be able to use t he Pl ayer and the var ious c o mmands i t feat ures , you need to
activa te i t. To acti vate th e Playe r, c lick on th e Pl ayer ar ea or pres s
keyboa rd. When you drag a med ia to t he P layer , i t is di rect ly a ctiv ated .
on th e
An orange re ctan gle dis played ar ound th e Playe r commands in dica tes t hat th e
Player are a is act ive:
6.2.3
MAKING THE PLAYER AREA FULL SCREEN
To vie w th e Pl ayer are a a s a f ull- scree n im age, pre ss
on th e ke yboar d.
Press the shor tcut key ag ain t o re vert to the norm a l dis pl ay .
6.2.4
ADJUSTING THE PLAYER VIDEO DISPLAY
You can adj ust t he Pl a yer vid eo d ispl ay vi a a conte xtua l menu . Yo u call t he
contex tua l men u by rig ht- clicki ng the Vide o Dis pla y zone on the Pla yer are a.
It gi ves the foll owin g di sp lay o ptio ns f or t he v ideo :
Field
Descri ption
Show T imeco de
This o ptio n of fers dif fere nt cho ices to disp lay t im ecode on
the p laye r win dow.
If th e lo aded mat eria l is a fil e:
59
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Field
Descri ption
• none – do es n ot d ispl ay any t imeco de
• intra TC – dis play s th e or igina l tim ecod e o f th e me dia
• start TC - d ispl ays a c o unter sta rtin g w ith 0 a t t he fi rst
frame of t he m edia
• both ( Intr a TC – Star t T C) – dis play s bo th th e c ounter
and or igi nal timec ode
If th e l oaded mat eria l is the reco rd t rain of an E VS Vid eo
Server (no t ap plic able to the Re cord er V ideo Disp l ay):
• none – do es n ot d ispl ay any t imeco de
• intra TC ( TOD) – p rovi de s a s ub-me nu w ith two o ption s:
Timeco de, T imec ode and Date.
Aspect Rat io
Offers a cho ice o f as p ect ra tios for t he di spl ay, ei ther
Auto, 4:3 or 16:9 .
This i s al so p ossi ble to u se th e fo llow ing shor tcuts :
+
•
•
+
to togg le b etwee n 4: 3 and 16: 9
to re set the disp lay to ‘Aut o’
Show S afeAr eas
Displa ys a sa fe area c age o n t he w indo w to determ ine
which are as of the pi ct ure will be se en and allow for
checki ng t he si ze of gr aphics with in t he me dia for sa fe
displa y.
Grab I mage
Grabs the cur rent ima ge, eith er in l ow r esol utio n or in hi gh
resolu tion . The def ault fo lder (C :\) w here the g rab is sto red
is def ined in Xed io M anager > Sof twar e > Parame ter
Profil es > Gen eral Set tin gs.
(not appl icab le t o th e Re corder Vid eo D ispl ay)
6.2.5
LOADING MEDIA ONTO THE PLAYER AREA
When yo u wan t to l oad a nd view a med ia or a cl ip avail able in t he pr ojec t onto t he
Player are a, y ou c an:
•
double -cli ck t he r eque ste d medi a or cli p
•
drag the m edia or clip on to th e Pl ayer area
•
Select two c lips in th e e dit fr om dif fere nt t imeli n e track s and drop them i n the
Player t o acces s to a media and s elec t the c orrect a udio tr acks . Thi s is
possib le o nly i f vid eo an d audio edit clip acce ss t h e same m edia w ith the s a me
timeco des.
The media wi ll be load ed onto the Play er and the transp ort con trol co mman ds will
become ava ilab le.
60
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
6.2.6
MOVING WITHIN MEDIA LOADED ON THE PLAYER AREA
T RANSPORT C ONTROLS
The fo llow ing tabl e sh ow s an o verv iew on t he v ari ous tr ansp ort cont rol co mmands
in th e Pl ayer .
The t able lis ts t he m ost used comm ands when t hey c an o nly be a cces s ed vi a a
shortc ut ke y. For a ful l li st of com mand s act ivat e d via a s hortc ut ke y, re fe r to the
append ix A ppen dix 2 – Keyboa rd Sh ortc uts, on page 2 28 t o th is us er m anual fo r
the d efau lt s etti ngs.
Note:
The us er c an defi ne t h e key board sh ortcu ts i n Xed io Ma nage r t o
perfor m tr ansp ort cont rol comma nds. The key s me ntion ed b elow are the
defau lt s etti ngs.
Field/ Icon
Keyboar d
Functio n Name an d Des cripti on
Shortcu t
Play/S top
(space bar )
Start /sto ps t he p revi ew ( video and /or audi o) o f a
clip or r ush.
The bu tton cha nges to a Stop i con w hen the
media is b eing pla yed.
‘Near Live ’ Pl ay Mo de
+
-
Launch es t he p revi ew a t the e nd o f a rush whi le
digit izin g.
Go to IN
-
Moves from the curre nt posit ion to th e Mar k IN
point .
Go to O UT
-
Moves from the curr ent p ositi on t o th e Ma rk OU T
point .
Fast F orwar d
Plays the medi a fo rward at a pres et f ast spee d.
The bu tton cha nges to a Stop i con w hen the
media is b eing pla yed for ward.
+
Fast F orwar d (w ith m odi fied s peed)
Change s th e pr eset spe e d to high er s peed val ue.
The sp eeds are set in Xe dio Ma nage r.
61
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Field/ Icon
Keyboar d
Functio n Name an d Des cripti on
Shortcu t
Fast R ewind
Plays the medi a ba ckwar d at a pr eset fas t sp eed.
The bu tton cha nges to a Stop i con w hen the
media is b eing pla yed ba ckward .
Fast R ewind (wi th mod if ied sp eed)
Change s th e pr eset spe e d to high er s peed val ue.
The sp eeds are set in Xe dio Ma nage r.
+
Previo us Fr ame
Moves 1 fr ame b efor e t he curre nt p osi tion in
Pause mode .
or
Next F rame
Moves 1 fr ame a fte r th e c urrent pos iti on i n Pa use
mode.
or
Previo us 1 0 Fra mes
-
Moves 10 f rames bef ore t he cur rent pos iti on i n
Pause mode .
or
+
Next 1 0 Fr ames
-
Moves 10 f rames af ter th e curr ent posi tio n in
Pause mode .
or
+
Playin g a cli p fr om ma rk I N to m ark O UT
62
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Field/ Icon
Keyboar d
Functio n Name an d Des cripti on
Shortcu t
-
Playin g a cli p in loo p fr o m mark IN t o ma rk OU T
+
The
,
and
keyboard shortc uts a re us ed to naviga te (i n a
combin atio n of shut tle a n d scrub at t he s ame t ime ) backw ards and f orwa rd s in A/ V
conten t.
This t able li sts thei r di ffe rent uses .
Keyboar d Sho rtcu t
Functio n De scrip tion
Shutt les/ scrub s ba ckwar d at t wice the rea l ti me s p eed.
Pressi ng r epea tedl y th e k ey wil l in crea se t he
shutt ling /scr ubbi ng s peed in a loo p: x 2, x 3, x5, x8 and
then back to x2.
Note
If ano ther key is p res sed be twee n the
repet itio ns, the shut tle/ sc rub sp eed is r eset .
Stops the prev iew of t he A/V co nten t.
Shutt les/ scrub s ba ckwar d at t wice the rea l ti me s p eed.
Pressi ng r epea tedl y th e k ey wil l in crea se t he
shutt ling /scr ubbi ng s peed in a loo p: x 2, x 3, x5, x8 and
then back to x2.
Note
If an othe r key is pres sed be twee n th e
repet itio ns, the shut tle/ sc rub sp eed is r eset .
Hold
+ t ap
Hold
+ t ap
Hold
+ ho ld
Hold
+ ho ld
Steps back ward 1 f rame at a time .
Steps forw ard 1 fr ame a t a time .
Plays backw ard at 33% of the rea l ti me s peed .
Plays forw ard at 3 3% of t he rea l t ime s peed .
63
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
J OG
Draggi ng the jo g bar all ows you to move wi thin the media at a var iabl e spee d
depend ing on:
•
the p osit ion of t he s peed indica tor
•
the sp eed rang e co vere d by th e jo g ar ea. The def ault r ange is set from -2 00%
to +2 00% . This is set in Xedio Mana ger.
Audio can be h eard whe n usin g th e jo g.
M EDIA B AR
The to p ar ea on t he b ar repres ents the med ia, or a po rtio n of it , cu rren tly load ed
on the P laye r. Th e mark IN, mark OUT an d now lin e are di spla yed o n thi s t op area
(See t he s ecti on ‘Nowl ine , Mark IN and M ark OUT’ on pag e 6 5).
The midd le are a inc lude s a dark gr ey zon e. Th i s zone sh ows th e port io n of the
media out of t he w hole media incl uded in the to p area and the pos itio n in t he
whole medi a:
64
•
When a media h as just b een load ed, th e top are a repres ents t he whol e me dia:
The da rk g rey area cov er s the whol e sp ace in the middle are a.
•
If yo u po siti on t he m ouse on t he mi ddle are a an d r otate the mous e wh eel u p or
down, you res pect ivel y e nlarge or red uce the dar k grey are a, henc e in crea sing
or red ucin g th e p orti on o f the m edia inc lude d i n th e top are a.
•
If you cli ck on the d ark grey are a and dra g it, y ou shift t he por tion o f media
includ ed in t he t op a rea.
•
When a mark IN an d ma rk OUT are def ined , dou ble- cl icki ng on the d ark grey
area wi ll t oggl e th e por t ion co vere d by t he t op area f rom t he en tire me dia
lengt h to the cli p l engt h ( porti on b etwee n ma rk IN and ma rk OU T).
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
N OWLINE , M ARK IN AND M ARK OUT
Three posi tion s ca n be d efine d in the med ia b ar:
•
An IN poin t ma rked on th e medi a is sho wn a s a gr een l ine.
To add a mark IN, cli ck at the re ques ted po siti on on the medi a bar an d cl ick
the Ma rk I N ic on
•
.
An OUT poin t ma rked on the me dia is s hown as a r ed li ne.
To add a ma rk OUT , clic k at the r eque sted posi ti on on th e medi a bar a nd click
the Ma rk OU T ic on
•
.
The n owli ne, tha t i s t o s a y the cu rren t p osit ion wit hin the medi a, is shown as a
blue line .
To pla ce the nowli ne a t a give n po siti on, simp ly c li ck at the req uest ed p osit i on
on th e med ia b ar.
To move thei r pos iti on, c l ick on them w ith the m ou se and drag them to th e desire d
posit ion.
When the med ia is bei n g played , the nowl ine m oves alo ng the top a rea of
media bar . I f t he port io n of th e t op a rea cov er s onl y a pa rt of the me dia,
nowlin e may disap pear . In this cas e, a red indi c ator, on th e left sid e or on
right sid e of th e Med ia b ar wil l b e di spla yed. A c l ick o n th e ve rtic al indi ca tor
the l eft or r ight sid e) w ill re-cen tre the top area to the n owlin e.
6.2.7
the
the
the
( on
CREATING AND WORKING WITH CLIPS IN THE PLAYER
When y ou h ave defi ned the port ion of the me dia y ou wa nt to p lace i nto t he
timeli ne, yo u can crea te a clip out of it an d eith e r store it in th e Clip zon e in the
Projec t ar ea a nd/o r pl ace it d irec tly in t he timel ine .
To creat e a clip , you wi ll mainl y use th e Clip C reati on but tons a vail able in th e
Player are a. T hese but to ns are des crib ed i n t he s ectio n be low.
C LIP C REATION F IELDS
65
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
The fo llow ing tabl e de scr ibes the vari ous fiel ds t h at ar e us ed t o cr eate cli p s:
Field/ Butto n
Keyboar d
Functio n Name an d Des cripti on
Shortcu t
Mark I N
or
Sets a mar k IN poi nt a t t he now line pos itio n on
the me dia bar:
• A time code val ue i s ad de d in M ark IN TC fi eld.
• A [ si gn is s hown on t he video disp lay
• A gree n mar k is add ed a t thi s ti mecod e on the
media bar.
Mark OU T
or
Sets a mar k OUT poi nt a t the nowli ne posi tion on
the me dia bar:
• the timec ode val ue is ad ded in Mark OUT TC
field .
• A ] si gn is s hown on t he video disp lay
• A red mar k is a dded at this t imeco de on the
media bar.
Clip N ame
Field wher e th e cl ip n am e can be ente red.
Mark I N TC
Timeco de of the M ark I N define d on the l oaded
media.
Mark OU T TC
Timeco de o f th e Mar k OU T def ined on the load ed
media.
Nowline TC
Timeco de o f th e no wlin e defin ed o n th e lo aded
media.
To move the mark IN , mark OUT or nowlin e to a given TC, type th e timeco d e in the
corres pond ing fiel d an d p ress E NTER.
You ca n ed it hours , mi nut es, s econd s or fra mes se parate ly in t he t imeco de f ields :
66
•
Double -cli ck on t he ho urs, min utes , sec onds or frame s area , and the
corres pond ing area wil l b e act ivat ed f or e diti ng.
•
Simple -cli ck in the tim ec ode f ield , th e cur sor sho uld bl ink on t he r ight and you
can t ype the full tim ecod e val ue
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
H OW TO M AKE A C LIP
Using the tran spor t co ntr ols l iste d ab ove, you can create a clip as foll ows:
1. Select th e req uest ed m e dia f rom t he M edia zon e and do uble -cli ck o n i t or drag
it to the Pla yer area . It wi ll op en i n th e Pl ayer .
2. Play the m edia usi ng t he transp ort cont rol comma n ds des crib ed o n pa ge 6 1 .
3. Positi on the now line at t he re ques ted pos itio n f or the Mar k IN po int and c lick
the Ma rk I N bu tton
.
4. Positi on the n owli ne at th e reques ted po siti on for t he Mark OUT po int an d cl ick
the Ma rk OU T bu tton
.
5. Enter a na me i n th e Cl ip Name f ield .
6. To sav e th e cl ip, dra g it t o Clip zon e.
It ca n th en b e pl aced lat e r on in t he t imel ine.
H OW TO M ODIFY A C LIP
To mod ify a cl ip, proc eed as f ollow s:
1. Select a clip in the Clip z one an d dr ag it t o th e Pl a yer ar ea.
2. Redefi ne t he m ark IN a nd mark OUT i n on e of th e f ollowi ng w ays:
a. Set a new mark IN an d/o r mark OUT usin g the no wline an d the
and
butt ons. The old mark IN /OUT wi ll be r emove d.
b. Drag t he m ark IN an d/or mark OU T to the new pos ition in the Medi a ba r.
3. Do one of the fol lowin g,
a. To save the cl ip as a ne w clip in the Cli p zone, drag the pi ctur e from the
Player are a to the Cli p zo ne of the Pro ject are a.
b. To sa ve t he clip and re pl ace t he m odif ied one , pr ess CT RL wh ile dra ggin g
the p ictur e fr om t he P l ayer a rea to t he Cl ip z one, o nto the clip to b e
replac ed.
67
Issue 4.1.B
6.2.8
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
SELECTING THE TRACKS TO BE ADDED TO THE TIMELINE
16 C HANNELS IN S TEREO AND / OR 5.1
The Xe dio S uite can ma nage t he r eadi ng, the ed iting and the expo rt o f fi les wi th
up to 16 audi o ch anne ls, groupe d in st ereo pair s a nd/or 5.1 gro ups.
Audio Channel Assignment
The au dio cha nnel ass i gnment of the sou rce fil es de pends on how the sourc e
materi al has bee n inclu d ed into Xed io, and on th e audio tra ck assig nmen t defined
when t he s ourc e ma teria l has been impo rted :
Source mate rial
Audio Chann el Ass ign ment of the A/V ma ter ial base d
on…
Media impor ted from
Media Impor ter
… the Defa ult Input A udio T rack Ass ignmen t set ting
defin ed i n Xe dio Mana ger: via Soft ware > P aramet er
Profil es > Gen eral > A udi o tab .
The us er ca n mo dify the d efau lt a ssig nme nt be fore
import ing th e A/V mat e rial in Me dia Imp orte r, via the
Setup, Aud io C hann els A ssignm ent tab.
Note
Once the audi o trac k assignm ent ha s bee n
defin ed in Xedi o Import er or AutoFi le Impo rter ,
these val ues will be use d ins tead of the de faul t
ones o n t he wo rkst atio n.
Media inge sted fro m
a Xedi o en code r
… the audi o ch anne ls d e fined for the giv en c hann el of the
physic al e ncod er. T his i s defi ned in Xe dio M an ager, via
Encode rs > Phy sica l Man ager > Enc oder Cha nnel Profil e.
Clip i mpor ted from
an EVS ser ver
… the Defa ult XT Input Audio Tra ck A ssign me nt se ttin g
defin ed i n Xe dio Mana ger: via Soft ware > P aramet er
Profil es > Gen eral > A udi o tab .
The us er ca n mo dify the d efau lt a ssig nme nt be fore
import ing th e A/V mat e rial in Me dia Imp orte r, via the
Setup, Aud io C hann els A ssignm ent tab.
Note
Once the audi o trac k assignm ent ha s bee n
defin ed in Xedi o Import er or AutoFi le Impo rter ,
these val ues will be use d ins tead of the de faul t
ones o n t he wo rkst atio n.
Record tra in o f an
EVS se rver loa ded
via t he d irec t ac cess
in Cle anEd it
68
… the audio typ e defin ed in the EVS serv er a pplica tio n
launch ed.
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Possible Audio Configurations
The po ssib le a udio con fig urati ons are:
•
up to 8 s tere o pa irs
•
up to 5 s tere o pa irs and one 5 .1 g roup
•
up to 2 s tere o pa irs and t wo 5.1 gro ups.
Within th e gener al set tin gs of Xedio Man ager , yo u need to chec k the Ena ble 5.1
managem ent p aram eter t o all ow th e ma nagem ent of 5. 1 tr acks in the Xedi o Suit e.
When e ncod ers inges t m edia, the y on ly u se s tere o tra cks.
When i mport ing fil es w ith 2, 4 , 8 or 16 a udio ch an nels, the ass ignm ent m us t fol low
the def ault p aram eters s et in the data base , as ex plain ed in se ctio n ‘ Aud io Channe l
Assign ment ’. In c ase t he defaul t ass ignme nts c an not be a ppli ed, a ll aud io tracks
will b e co nsid ered as ster eo pa irs.
The A/V c onte nt of e ach media is d ispl ayed in t he A/V Con ten ts col umn of the
Media M gr t ab. F or e ach edit, it is di spla yed in t h e Audi o Typ e co lumn of t he Edi t
Mgr ta b.
Note:
The outp ut of 16 aud io channe ls is man aged th r ough a mult i -ch anne l
audio bo ard. T o make s ure that X edio c an use this aud io boa rd, yo u
need to man uall y chan g e the audi o board a ssig nment in th e Contr ol
Panel of Wi ndows ( Soun ds and Audi o devi ces p ropert ies > Pla ybac k
and Re cord ing opti ons) .
T RACK S ELECTION FOR C LIPS AND M ONITORING
Overview
All t he a vail able aud io s o urces from a me dia are di splaye d be low the Play er .
A ster eo track is repr ese nted by
.
A 5.1 tra ck i s re prese nte d by
In st ereo mode , up to 8 t r acks a ppea r as fol lows :
(8 s tereo )
(4 s tereo )
In 5. 1 an d st ereo mode , up to 16 chan nels can be shown as foll ows:
(two 5.1 trac ks a nd two stereo tra cks)
stereo tra cks)
(one 5.1 tr ack and six
69
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
When y ou crea te a c lip t o be pla ced on a timel in e, yo u n eed to sel ect th e vid eo
and re ques ted audi o t rac ks usi ng the butt ons und erneat h t he V ideo Disp la y zone :
Video and Audio Selection
The vi deo a nd au dio sele ction is t aken into acc ou nt whe n you drag a cl ip f rom the
player to the tim elin e:
Clicki ng on the V ideo bu tton wi ll r emove the v ide o from t he Pl ayer w indo w and
disabl e it so t hat the c li p made has n o vid eo, t he dis play ed bu tton wil l turn to
white.
Clicki ng o n the lef t or r ight t rian gle o f an audi o stere o tra ck wi ll di sabl e
respec tive ly th e left o r right ch anne l of th e corres pond ing au dio tr a ck. The
displa yed but ton w ill tur n to wh ite .
A 5.1 audi o tr ack is d isa bled b y cl icki ng t he louds peaker but t on on t he r igh t of th e
radio but ton
The ta ble summa rize s ho w the but tons loo k li ke d e pendin g on th e se lect ion:
Enabled
Video
Audio
70
Disabl ed
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
Audio Monitoring Selection
The radi o butto ns betw e en each pai r of ster eo a udio cha nnel bu tt o ns or next to a
5.1 a udio cha nnel but ton allow the sele cti on o f on e audi o tr ack for m onit orin g:
•
In stereo mod e: the fir st radio butt on for chan nel s 1 and 2, the se cond ra dio
butto n for cha nnel s 3 a n d 4, t he t hird rad io bu tto n for chan nels 5 an d 6, and
so on unt il c hann els 15 a nd 16 .
•
In 5. 1 a nd S tere o mod e: in th e e xampl e, com binin g tw o 5 .1 trac ks a nd 2
stereo tr acks , the fir st r adio but ton sel ects ch an nels 1 to 6, the sec ond r adio
butto n sel ects c hann els 7 to 12, the t hird r adio but ton sel ect s chan nels 13 and
14 and th e fo urth rad io b utton sel ects cha nnel s 15 and 16.
Audio m eter s loc ated o n the r ight side of th e Video Disp lay r epres ent th e
monito red trac k. R efer to sect ion 6.4 ‘Aud io Me ter s / Tr im A rea’ on page 81 .
Note:
When y ou r ight -cli ck on a 5. 1 ra dio butt on, a popup menu app ears in
which yo u can s elec t the 5.1 comp onen ts th at sho uld be mo nito red on t he
left and ri ght cha nnel s. You can choo se betw ee n the follo wing op tion s:
Mixed, L+R , Ls +Rs o r Ce nter ( out put on L +R sp ea kers).
Examples
If a c lip h as t o be c reat ed wit hout audi o fo r the channe ls 1 and 2, di sabl e the 2
butto ns o f th ose chan nel s:
Clicki ng on the left audi o butt on wi ll re move the left a udio comp onen t fr om th e
source s o that th e clip made has no l eft au dio channe l. In th is case , t he right
channe l wi ll b e ou tpu t on the left and rig ht.
Clicki ng i n ad dit ion on the righ t au dio but to n will rem ove the righ t aud io
compon ent so t hat the cli p made has no righ t au di o chan nel .
71
Issue 4.1.B
6.2.9
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
ADDING LOGS TO THE MEDIA LOADED ON THE PLAYER AREA
D EFINITION
The lo gs a re re fere nce p oints tha t can be plac ed wherev er n eede d on the media
loaded on the Pla yer. Th eir p urpos e i s to mark po ints of i nter est on the me dia a nd
to facil ita te rapi d move ment betw een the m. Th e logs are man aged wi th the
follow ing but tons :
I NTERNAL AND E XTERNAL L OGS
A dis tinc tion can be draw n betw een inte rnal and e xterna l l ogs.
The in tern al l ogs a re p la ced by th e us er o n th e m edia load ed o n th e Pl ayer .
They a re d ispl ayed on th e medi a ba r as yel low tri angles .
The ext ernal logs c orre spond t o log s crea ted i n and impo rted from I PDir ector , if
the i nsta llat ion is p rope rl y set up. An inte rest ran k ing i s as sign ed t o th em.
They a re d ispl ayed on th e medi a ba r as tra nspa re nt tr iang les.
When y ou r ight -cli ck o n a lo g on a m edia bar where the two type s of logs are
displa yed, a co ntex tual menu appe ars and l et y ou selec t the log s that should
appear :
A DDING A L OG
To ad d a log on the me dia, plac e t he n owli ne a t the re ques ted posi tion on th e
media an d click t he Add Log button
yellow tri angl e on th e vi d eo fr ame.
72
. The log is added on th e media a s a
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
M OVING B ETWEEN L OGS
To move to the lo g posi ti on on the lef t of the now l ine, cli ck the Lef t Log bu tton
.
To move to th e log pos iti on on the ri ght of th e no wline, c lick t he Right Lo g button
.
R EMOVING A L OG
To remo ve a log, move to the l og t o be remov ed u sing t he
or
butto ns. T he n,
click the Add L og b utto n simult aneo usly wit h th e C TRL key on the key board .
6.2.10 CREATING A CLIP ON AN EVS VIDEO SERVER FROM THE
PLAYER AREA
G ENERAL P ROCESS
When th e medi a loa ded on the P laye r area is a r ecord t rain from a n EVS Server ,
you can save the cr eate d clip on the E VS Ser ver and in t he Xe dio d atab as e at the
same tim e. To do th is, y ou will clic k the S ave b u tton n ext t o the C lip Na me fiel d
once y ou h ave def ined yo ur mar k IN and mark OUT :
This w ill ope n th e EV S Serv er D ata wind ow in w hich you ca n sp ecify the
necess ary i nform atio n t o save t he cl ip on the EVS Serv er an d on th e Xedio
databa se.
EVS S ERVER D ATA W INDOW
EVS Video Server Tab
In the EVS Serve r Da ta window , the EVS Vide o Server tab allo ws yo u to speci fy
the c lip name , I Ds, rank ing, type an d ke ywor ds as it wi ll b e s aved on t he EVS
Video Serv er.
73
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
The LSM ID fiel d i s th e only
mandat ory in t his tab .
You need to se lect t he A dd to
Current C E Proj ect op t ion if
you wa nt t he cl ip t o be added
to th e p roje ct i n t he C lip zone,
once the clip has bee n sa ved.
CleanEdit Tab
In th e EV S Se rver Dat a window , th e Cl eanE dit ta b all ows you to spec ify t he cl ip
label ( name) , medi a cl ass and d escr ipti on as it will b e save d in th e Xedio
databa se.
The l abel an d Me dia Clas s
field s ar e man dato ry f ield s.
You nee d to s elec t the P ublish
optio n if you want to have
access to the cli p in Cle a nEdit .
Metadata Tab
In the EVS Se rver Da t a window, t he Meta data tab allows y ou to spe cify the
metada ta f or the clip . Th i s meta data wil l be sto red in t he X edio dat abas e.
74
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
6.3
RECORDER AREA
6.3.1
OVERVIEW
The Re cord er area all ow s you to pr eview ed its an d to brow se thro ugh the t imelin e.
The c ommand s o n t he R e corder ar ea a re only ava i lable whe n an ed it is ope n. Th e
Record er a rea inte ract s with th e tim eli ne a s the two areas are d iffer ent
repres enta tion s of t he sa me edit . The t imel ine p ro vides a grap hica l repr ese ntati on
and the r ecord er, a v is ual are a to act uall y vie w the medi a repr esen te d on the
timeli ne.
The sc reen shot bel ow h ig hligh ts t he v ario us z ones in t he R ecord er:
The fo llow ing tabl e br iefl y desc ribe s th e var ious zones on t he Re cord er a rea an d
refers to the sec tion wher e the fie lds are deta iled .
Area
1.
Descri ption
Video D ispl ay
It di spla ys t he v ideo mat erial loa ded on t he T imeli ne.
Parame ters rela ted to t he dis play are ava ilab l e via a
contex tua l men u.
See also t he sect ion 6. 2.4 ‘Adj usti ng the P laye r Vide o
Displa y’ o n pa ge 5 9.
75
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Area
2.
Descri ption
Track
Monitor ing
Buttons
They ref lect t he aud io ty pe and tra cks of t he loa ded edit
and allow t he sele ctio n of the aud io trac k you want t o
monito r.
See al so th e sec tion 6.3 . 6 ‘Sel ecti ng th e Mon itor e d Audi o
Tracks ’ on pag e 80 .
3.
Jog
It al lows the use rs t o na v igate in the load ed m ater i al.
See also th e secti on 6.3.5 ‘P layi ng the Ed it in the
Record er Ar ea’ on page 7 7.
4.
Edit
Informa tion
These fi elds pr ovid e ge neral in forma tio n on the loaded
edit.
See also th e secti on 6.3.5 ‘P layi ng the Ed it in the
Record er Ar ea’ on page 7 7.
5.
6.
Transpo rt
Control
Buttons
They ar e use d to p lay the med ia re pres ente d in the
timeli ne.
Valida tion
Buttons
They a re us ed t o ch eck the e dit or f lag it a s r eady t o
broadc ast.
See also th e secti on 6.3.5 ‘P layi ng the Ed it in the
Record er Ar ea’ on page 7 7.
See also th e secti on 6 .3.7 ‘Ch eckin g the Edi t in the
Record er Ar ea’ on page 8 0.
6.3.2
ACTIVATING THE RECORDER AREA
To be able to use th e Re corder an d the var ious co mmands it fe atur es, you need to
activa te it . To ac tiva te th e Record er, cl ick o n the Record er are a or pre ss
the k eyboa rd.
on
An orang e recta ngle d isp layed ar ound t he Reco rd er comman ds ind icat es t hat the
Record er ar ea is a ctiv e.
6.3.3
MAKING THE RECORDER AREA FULL SCREEN
To vie w th e Rec orde r ar e a as a fu ll-s cree n ima ge, press
Press agai n
76
to re vert to the n ormal dis play .
on the keyb oard .
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
6.3.4
Issue 4.1.B
ADJUSTING THE RECORDER VIDEO DISPLAY
You can ad just t he Rec order vi deo di spla y via a contex tual m enu. Yo u call th e
contex tua l men u by rig ht- clicki ng the Vide o Dis pla y zone on the Reco rder a rea.
The disp lay opt ions a re simila r to the on es of th e Player Vi deo Dis play . For mor e
inform atio n, ref er to th e section 6 .2.4 ‘ Adju stin g the Playe r Vide o Displ ay’, on
page 5 9.
6.3.5
PLAYING THE EDIT IN THE RECORDER AREA
E DIT I NFORMATION
Two fie lds on t he Re co rder a rea h ighl ight ed o n the scree nsho t be low provi de
genera l i nform atio n on th e edi t lo aded on the Rec order:
•
The up per fiel d sp eci fies the n owlin e po sit ion in t h e edi t.
•
The lo wer fiel d sp ecif ies the e dit labe l.
T RANSPORT C ONTROLS
The fol lowi ng ta ble sh ow s an ove rview on th e var ious tr ansp ort c omman ds in the
Record er ar ea. The tab le list s:
•
all the c ommand s that can be acce ssed v ia the user in terf ace or the
Shutt lePRO .
•
the most used c omman ds when the y can on ly be access ed via a shor tcut key.
For a full li st of com ma nds only ac tiv ated vi a a shortc ut key , refer t o the
append ix to t his user ma nual for the defa ult set tin gs.
Note:
The us er c an defi ne t h e key board sh ortcu ts i n Xed io Ma nage r t o
perfor m tr ansp ort cont rol comma nds. The key s me ntion ed b elow are the
defau lt s etti ngs.
77
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Button
Keyboar d
Functio n Name an d Des cripti on
Shortcu t
Play/S top
(space bar )
Start /sto ps t he p layb ack or pre view (vi deo
and/or aud io) of the edit e d mate rial on the
timeli ne from the nowl ine posi tion .
The bu tton cha nges to a Stop b utto n whe n t he
media is b eing pla yed.
Go to B egin
Moves from the curr ent p ositi on t o th e
beginn ing of the edit loa d ed on the tim elin e.
Go to End
Moves from the curr ent p ositi on t o th e en d of
the e dit load ed o n th e t im eline .
Go to Prev ious Trans iti on
or
Moves to the pre viou s e d it po int on the ti meli ne
(consi deri ng t he s elec ted track s).
Go to N ext Trans itio n
or
Moves to t he n ext edi t po int o n th e ti meli ne
(consi deri ng t he s elec ted track s).
Previo us Fr ame
or
Moves 1 fr ame b efor e t he curre nt p osi tion in
Pause mode .
Next F rame
or
Moves 1 fr ame a fte r th e c urrent pos iti on i n
Pause mode .
The
,
and
keyboard shortc uts a re us ed to naviga te (i n a
combin atio n of shut tle a n d scrub at t he s ame t ime ) backw ards and f orwa rd s in A/ V
conten t.
78
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
This t able li sts thei r di ffe rent uses .
Keyboar d Sho rtcu t
Functio n De scrip tion
Shutt les/ scrub s ba ckwar d at t wice the rea l ti me s p eed.
Pressi ng r epea tedl y th e k ey wil l in crea se t he
shutt ling /scr ubbi ng s peed in a loo p: x 2, x 3, x5, x8 and
then back to x2.
Note
If ano ther key is p res sed be twee n the
repet itio ns, the shut tle/ sc rub sp eed is r eset .
Stops the prev iew of t he A/V co nten t.
Shutt les/ scrub s ba ckwar d at t wice the rea l ti me s p eed.
Pressi ng r epea tedl y th e k ey wil l in crea se t he
shutt ling /scr ubbi ng s peed in a loo p: x 2, x 3, x5, x8 and
then back to x2.
Note
If an othe r key is pres sed be twee n th e
repet itio ns, the shut tle/ sc rub sp eed is r eset .
Hold
+ t ap
Hold
+ t ap
Hold
+ ho ld
Hold
+ ho ld
Steps back ward 1 f rame at a time .
Steps forw ard 1 fr ame a t a time .
Plays backw ard at 33% of the rea l ti me s peed .
Plays forw ard at 3 3% of t he rea l t ime s peed .
Note
The use o f Shut tlePR O keys fo r tran spor t func ti ons is de tail ed in t he
append ix 1 .
79
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
J OG
Draggi ng the jo g bar all ows you to move wi thin the media at a var iabl e spee d
depend ing on:
•
the p osit ion of t he s peed indica tor
•
the sp eed rang e co vere d by th e jo g ar ea. The def ault r ange is set from -2 00%
to +2 00% . This is set in Xedio Mana ger.
Audio can be h eard whe n usin g th e jo g.
6.3.6
SELECTING THE MONITORED AUDIO TRACKS
At ed it crea tion , the aud i o typ e for the ed it is spe cifie d: All Ster eo, One 5. 1 + 5x
stereo , Tw o 5. 1 + 2x s ter eo. Th is s elec tio n is ref le cted in t he R ecord er a rea :
Once cl ips ha ve bee n lo aded on t he tim elin e, al l the outp ut tr acks c orre s pondin g
to tim eli ne t racks whi ch c ontai n au dio are acti vate d:
The ra dio butt ons belo w the vide o di spla y al low the s elec tion of the audi o trac k
you wa nt t o mo nito r.
Exampl es o f au dio trac k displa ys in t he Re cord er area:
6.3.7
CHECKING THE EDIT IN THE RECORDER AREA
The
butto n al lows you to ch eck the e dit once it is fin aliz ed. Th e
checks c onsi st of i dent if ying po ssib le bla nks in t he edit o r fas t motio n cli ps to be
render ed, b ut al so mis si ng hi-r es fi les in the e di t. You n eed to chec k yo ur edit
before yo u can chan ge it s status to R2B (r eady to broa dcas t). The R2B bu t ton w ill
not be come a vail able in case ho les a re di scov ere d in th e edi t or f ast m oti on cli ps
are no t r ender ed.
Refer to sect ion 2.9 ‘Che cking the Edi t’ o n pa ge 1 6 for the des crip tion of w indows
and me ssag es wh ich are displa yed in the diff eren t cases.
The
button allow s you to change the stat us of yo ur edi t, an d set it as
‘ready to br oadca st’ . You will do t his w hen yo u no longer w ant t o modi fy y our edi t
in Cle anEd it.
Once y ou c lick the R2B b utton , th e ma nager can e asily sear ch f or the R 2B edits in
Xedio Appr oval to appr ov e or r ejec t t hem.
Some au tomat ic pr oces s es may a lso b e lau nched when yo u cli ck th e R2B butto n,
80
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
such a s res tori ng t he archiv ed h i-res ele ment s corr espon ding to the lo-re s
elemen ts of the R2B ed it, or the automa tic ren deri ng of the edit t o vario us t argets ,
such a s an EVS vid eo s er ver.
6.4
AUDIO METERS / TRIM AREA
or
The au dio mete rs a re l o cated betw een the Play e r and Reco rder are as i n an are a
shared wit h th e tr im o per ation s po ssib le o n th e ti meline .
Clicki ng t he
but ton w ill t oggle to the audi o me ter displa y.
Clicki ng t he
butto n wil l toggl e to the t rim b utto n s. For m ore info rmati on
on the t rim f unct ions , r efer to the s ecti on 7. 1 1 ‘Trimm ing Ed it Po ints on the
Timeli ne’, on page 135 .
The a udio di spla y wi ll fo llow the act ive wind ow, Player or Rec orde r, as will the
audio out puts .
When the Play er area is acti ve, the au dio mete r s wil l o nly disp lay the m onito red
tracks :
•
In ster eo mo de: f rom 1& 2 to 15& 16 (i f 16 a udio channe ls ar e pre sent in the
media file )
•
In a 5.1 and st ereo mod e: 6 audio ch anne ls for a 5.1 track o r 2 for a st ereo
track.
81
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
When the Reco rder ar ea is active, al l enab led o utput s will be dis play ed in the
audio met ers. If 16 cha n nels are sel ecte d, the 8 audiom eter s ar e v isib le a t a time
and tw o ar row butt ons all ow to shif t f rom c hann els 1 to 8 t o ch anne ls 9 to 1 6:
Db valu es ar e di spla yed on eac h sid e.
Xedio Ma nager > P aram eter Pro file s >
satura tio n leve l, th e war ning le vel an d
and -1 6 ar e sh own as we l l if they do not
82
T hey c orr espond to t he va lues def ined i n
Gene ral > Vumete r for th e top le vel, th e
the b ott o m level . Valu es for 0, - 2 , -4, -8
over writ e the d atab ase valu es.
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
6.5
TIMELINE AREA
6.5.1
OVERVIEW
The Tim elin e is the area where , thr ough a g raph i cal re pres enta tion of the edit in
progre ss, med ia can be manipul ated t o easil y and effi cien tly ma ke an edite d
packag e.
The Time line i s made u p of the el emen ts hig hlig ht ed on the s cree nsho t and shortl y
descri bed in the tabl e be l ow:
Area
1.
Descri ption
Audio Outp ut
Matrix Butt on
This b utt on g ives acc ess to a n Au dio Outp ut M atr ix us ed
to defin e whic h timel ine track will b e rout ed to which
outpu t tr ack.
See al so the sect ion ‘ Audio Trac k Se lect ion for t he
Output ’ o n pa ge 9 5.
2.
Fill B utton
When the Fil l butt on is active , the med ia drag ge d to the
Clip zo ne is a utom atic ally pl aced at th e end of th e
timeli ne.
See also the se ctio n 7.3 ‘ Placin g Clips on to the Ti meline ’,
on pag e 1 07.
3.
Editin g
Commands
The Ed itin g bu tton s al lo w the user s to perf orm variou s
editi ng a ctio ns o n th e ed i t loa ded.
See al so t he s ecti on 6.5.1 0 ‘E diti ng B utto ns in t he
Timeli ne A rea’ , on pag e 100.
4.
Timecod e Ba r
The Time code bar g ives a gradu atio n of the t ime code of
the e dit.
See al so the sect ion 6.5. 2 ‘Tim ecod e Bar ’, on p ag e 84.
83
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Area
5.
Descri ption
TC and
Duratio n
Fields
The t imeco de and dura tio n fie lds pro vide tim e i nfo rmatio n
on the p osit ion o f the mark IN, m ark OUT , full ed it
durat ion, or dura tion bet ween ma rks.
See al so t he s ecti on 6.5.8 ‘Tim ecod e an d Durati on
Fields ’, on p age 92.
6.
Track
Select ion and
Audio
Settin gs
The bu tton s fo r tr ack sel ectio n on the lef t of the t rack a re
used to s elec t:
• the tr acks to b e ta ken into accou nt i n an e ditin g
operat ion
• the a udio ou tput (an d mo de) i n pl ayou t, rend erin g , and
export ac tions .
The bu tton s on th e ri ght of th e tr ack are used :
• to de fine the aud io r outi n g for ste reo trac ks
• to zo om t he t rack , an d p erform fin e t unin g on the audi o
tracks .
See al so t he s ecti on 6 . 5.9 ‘A udio Tra ck Se lect i on and
Setti ngs in t he T imeli ne’ , on p age 93.
7.
Timeli ne
Displa y
This is a grap hica l repr esenta tio n of th e edi t, i n which
users exec ute and visu ali ze th e ed itin g ac tion s.
See al so from sect ion 6.5 .4 to sec tion 6.5 .6.
8.
Scale Bar and
Move Ba r
The Sc ale bar and Mov e bar all ow t he u ser to easi ly
naviga te in t he t imel ine.
See also th e secti on 6.5 .3 ‘Scal e Bar and Mov e Bar’, on
page 8 5.
6.5.2
TIMECODE BAR
The time code b ar, lo cate d above t he tim elin e disp lay, di spla ys a gra duat io n of th e
timeco de i n t he t imel in e. Th e ti mecod e o f th e firs t fr ame will sta rt with the
timeco de d efin ed w hen th e edi t was cre ated .
The m ost prec ise gra dua tion is a g radu atio n b y f rame, i.e . f rom fram e 0 t o 24 in
PAL, a nd f rom frame 0 to 29 i n NTSC .
The t imeco de bar disp l ays t he tags (gr aphi cs) and the cue po ints (r eferen ce
marks) . Right -cli ckin g th e timeco de bar op ens th e context ual me nu from w hich you
can de fine tags and c ue point s. Fo r more inf orm ation , ref er to the sect io ns 7.8
‘Cue P oint s’, on p age 12 5 and 11. 2 ‘A ddin g a Log o or G raph ic’, on page 19 3.
84
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
6.5.3
Issue 4.1.B
SCALE BAR AND MOVE BAR
S CALE B AR
The Sc ale bar, lo cate d b elow t he timel ine dis play on t he r ight ha nd s ide, makes it
possib le to z oom i n an d o ut on the tim elin e:
•
To zoo m in , dr ag t he s lid er to the lef t or ro tate the mouse whee l d own.
•
To zoo m ou t, d rag the sli der t o th e ri ght or r otat e t he mou se wh eel up.
M OVE B AR
The Move bar, l ocat ed b elow th e time line disp lay on the l eft h and si de, m akes it
possib le to mov e with in the time line wh en the w hole tim elin e is not di spl ayed i n
the t imel ine pane at the d efine d sc ale.
6.5.4
REFERENCE POSITIONS ON THE TIMELINE DISPLAY
The fo llow ing m arks can be pla ced to de fine a sp e cific posi tion in the t imel i ne and
to be use d in edi ting ope r ation s:
N OWLINE
This i s th e b lue v ert ical marker tha t di spla ys t he curren t po siti on o n t he t i meline .
It is use d to bro wse in t h e time line or mark an ins ertio n po siti on.
85
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
M ARK IN / M ARK OUT P OINTS
The mark IN p oint i s a gr een vert ical l ine on t he ti meline t hat di spla ys the posit ion
of a m ark IN p oint .
The ma rk OUT po int is a red ve rtic al line on the ti meline tha t d ispl ays the posit ion
of a m ark OUT p oint .
You wi ll a dd m ark IN an d mark OUT p oint s to he lp you plac e med ia i n t he t i meline .
6.5.5
TIMELINE ELEMENT ON THE TIMELINE DISPLAY
D ESCRIPTION
The t imel ine eleme nt is the por tion of the me dia a dded to the ti meli ne an d
displa yed as a b lock on t he ti meli ne. It corr espo n ds to on e tr ack of a c lip added to
the t imel ine:
D EFAULT D ISPLAYED I NFORMATION
The e leme nt disp lay on a tra ck can con tain up to se ven inf orma tion fi el ds. B y
defau lt, the info rmat ion d isplay ed is t he f ollo wing :
Positi on
Informa tion Disp laye d
Top le ft
Clip n ame
Top ri ght
Elemen t du rati on
Bottom lef t
TL TC IN (TC IN of the el ement in the timel ine)
Bottom rig ht
TL TC O UT (T C OUT of t he el ement in the time lin e)
M ODIFYING THE D EFAULT I NFORMATION
The d efau lt info rmati on c an be mod ifie d v ia the S etting s > Cli p Di spla y S etting s
command from t he Tim el ine Ele ment c ont extu al menu (av ail able w hen y o u right click in the time line dis pl ay).
This ca lls t he Cl ip Di splay S etti ngs w indow where y ou can spec i fy whic h
inform atio n sh ould be dis played on the time lin e el ements :
86
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
6.5.6
Issue 4.1.B
COLOR REPRESENTATION ON THE TIMELINE DISPLAY
O VERVIEW
To assi st in r ecog nizi n g the pr ocess es an d di ffere nt act ions that hav e been
perfor med on t he t imel ine , var ious col ors a nd type s of shad ing are us ed .
Note
The color s of the tra cks can look di ffer entl y on yo ur screen de pend ing on
your se ttin gs. Th e defa ul t color s of th e time line t r acks can be cha nged i n
Xedio Mana ger, vi a S oft ware > Pa rame ter Prof il es > (Xe dio) Cle anEd it:
TL Col ors tab.
87
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
C OLORS ON THE V IDEO T RACK
Video elem ent with no ap plied eff ects
Video elem ent with spe ed othe r th an 1 00%
Video eleme nt wi th FX (dark er bl ue el emen t than
normal )
Video elem ent with a f ree ze fr ame
C OLORS ON THE A UDIO T RACK
Normal audi o e lemen t in sync w ith an a ssoc iate d v ideo
Normal audi o e lemen t wi t h FX
Audio e lemen t whi ch has been mov ed ou t of sy nc with
its a ssoc iate d vi deo
Normal voic e-ov er e leme nt
Voice- over th at att enua t es the oth er trac ks (on the
same o utpu t).
6.5.7
CONTEXTUAL MENUS FOR TIMELINE ELEMENTS
I NTRODUCTION
You ca n ac cess sev eral c ommands for tim elin e el e ments via a co ntex tual m enu.
The con tex tual m enu is a vailab le wh en y ou ri ght- c lick o n a se lec ted v ideo o r audi o
elemen t on the tim elin e.
The co mmand s av aila ble in th e co ntex tual menu v ary de pend ing on:
88
•
Whethe r yo u ri ght- clic k o n a v ideo or audi o el eme nt
•
Whethe r th e el emen t is s elect ed o r no t
•
Where the m ouse cur sor i s loca ted when you rig ht- click on an e lemen t
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
The vario us comma nds a vailab le from th e conte xt ual menu are sh ortl y pre sented
in th e s ecti ons belo w. H owever you wil l f ind det a ils o n s ome of t he comm ands in
the r elev ant sect ions of t he man ual.
C OMMANDS C OMMON TO V IDEO AND A UDIO E LEMENTS
Clip Commands
The Cl ip com mand s in th e cont extu al me nu a re av ailab le wh en yo u ri ght- cli ck on a
select ed vide o or aud io e lement on the tim elin e. T he ac tion s ar e av ail able f or bo th
video and aud io e lemen ts, e xcep t th e An gle op tion, onl y pr esen t fo r a vide o
elemen t:
Command
Descri ption
Clip > Cop y Cl ip FX
Copies the ef fects de fine d on the sel e cted elem en t.
Clip > Pas te C lip FX
Pastes the effe cts (w hich have b een c opie d usi ng the Cop y
Clip F X com mand) on to t he se lect ed e lemen t.
Clip > Res ync
Resync hroni zes a s elec t ed desy nchro nize d aud io elemen t
with the vid eo elem ent th at belon gs to the same cl ip or to a
synchr oniz ed g roup .
See also 7 .7. 1 ‘Re synchr oniz ing
Elemen ts’, on page 122 .
Clip > Syn c Gr oup
As soci at ed
Clip
Create s a syn chro nize d group wit h t he selec ted elemen ts.
When one of th ose sy nc hroniz ed el ement s wil l b e moved,
the o ther elem ents wil l a ppear as b eing des ynch r onized .
See a lso 7.7. 5 ‘G roup in g Elem ents in a S ync G roup’ , on
page 1 24.
Clip > Cre ate C lip
Saves the sele cted ele me nt as a c lip in t he C lip zo ne.
Clip > Del ete
Delete s th e se lect ed e le ments
89
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Undo/Redo Commands
The Undo a nd Red o com mands ar e ava ilab le on a select ed vi deo o r audi o elemen t
on whi ch a n ed itin g ac tio n has been per form ed:
•
The Undo comm and all o ws the user to c ance l th e editin g acti on(s) t hat h ave
been p erfo rmed aft er t he last save . Yo u ca n al so cancel the edi tin g ac tion s by
pressi ng
•
.
The Redo c omman d all o ws the us er to reap ply t he edit ing a ctio n(s) that have
been c ance lled af ter the l ast s ave.
Settings Commands
The Se tting s c ommand s are avai labl e wh en y ou righ t-cl ick on a vi deo o r aud io
elemen t on the tim elin e, wheth er i t is sel ecte d o r not . The fo llowi ng a cti ons ar e
availa ble :
90
Command
Descri ption
Fit t o Con ten t
When t he e dit expa nds beyond th e ti meli ne d is play, thi s
command fi ts t he wh ole e dit i nto the time line dis pl ay.
Show o ut o f ra nge
messag e
When t he c omman d is ti cked, the app lica tion wil l dis play
warnin g messa ges wh en no mater ial i s avai labl e t o perfo rm
the r eques ted edi ting act i on.
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
Command
Descri ption
Clip D ispl ay S etti ngs
Opens t he Cl ip Di splay Setti ngs wi ndow in whi c h you ca n
defin e whi ch i nform ati on will be d ispl ayed on th e time line
elemen ts. See sect ion 6.5.5 ‘Tim elin e El emen t on t he
Timeli ne D ispla y 86 .
C OMMANDS A PPLICABLE TO V IDEO E LEMENTS
The Clip > Angl e, Spee d, Video Cli p FX, Conv ersion FX , and Left /Rig ht Vide o
Transi tion FX c omman ds are only app lica ble to s e lecte d vi deo eleme nts.
For mor e in form atio n on t hese c omman ds, refe r to the se ctio n 7. 5 ‘R epla cin g Clip s
by Linked Cl ips’ on p ag e 117 for the Cli p Angle command, to se ctio n 7. 10.2 on
page 1 32 for the S peed command , an d to th e cha pter 8 ‘Ad vanc ed V ideo Editi ng’,
on pag e 1 40 f or t he o ther comman ds.
C OMMANDS A PPLICABLE TO A UDIO E LEMENTS
The Aud io Ch annel s, R ight/L eft Au dio T rans iti on, Get Audi o Wav efor m, and
Duplic ate T rack comm an ds are on ly ap pli cabl e to select ed audi o el ement s.
The Au dio Chann els o ption is exp lain ed in th e sec tion 10 .3 ‘Aud io Routin g,
Swaps and M utes ’, on p a ge 181 .
The Ri ght/L eft A udio T ransit ion opti ons are de taile d in sec tion 10. 2.5 ‘ Adding
Audio Tran siti on E ffec ts on Ele ment s of the Sam e Track ’ on pag e 17 7.
The Get Au dio Wav efor m and Dupl icat e Track featur es are e xpla ined in th e
sectio n 1 0.5 ‘Misc ella neo us Aud io F eatu res’ on pa ge 185 .
91
Issue 4.1.B
6.5.8
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
TIMECODE AND DURATION FIELDS
The t imeco de info rmat io n dis play ed on the time l ine d ispl ay is s hort ly de scribe d
below. The se f ield s ar e n ot ed itab le.
The f ollo wing ta ble exp la ins the vari ous TC and d urati on fiel ds h igh ligh ted in the
above scre ensh ot.
Area
Descri ption
1.
Mouse P oint er
TC
When t he m ouse is on t h e time lin e di spla y, t he ti mecode
posit ion of the mous e point er i s s peci fied on the l eft
above the time line di spla y.
2.
IN fie ld
The IN fi eld , on th e ri ght a bove th e t imeli ne displa y ,
indica tes t he ti mecod e of the ma rk IN p osit ion on the
timeli ne, if any m ark IN p oint is d efin ed.
(Mark IN TC )
A tool tip wi th t he mar k I N TC is a lso d ispl ayed w hen you
posit ion the curs or o n th e mark IN g reen lin e.
OUT fi eld
(Mark OUT TC )
The OUT fiel d, on th e right abo ve the ti meli ne displa y ,
corres pond s to the time c ode of the mar k OUT pos ition on
the t imel ine, if any mark OUT po int is d efin ed.
A toolti p with t he mark OUT TC is also d ispl aye d when
you po sit ion the curs or o n the mark OUT red line .
DUR fie ld
(Durati on
IN/OUT)
92
The DUR fiel d, o n th e r ight a bove the tim elin e displa y,
corres pond s to th e dura tion be tween the ma rk IN and
mark OU T po ints def ined on th e ti meli ne.
3.
Timeli ne
Duratio n
The Ti meli ne Du rati on f ield, loc ated on the righ t of t he
editi ng but tons , disp lay s the eff ecti ve dur atio n of the
timeli ne loa ded, ca lcul a ted from th e star t of t he first
elemen t to th e en d of the last elem ent .
-
Nowline TC
The t imeco de o f t he n ow line appe ars as y ou p osi tion the
cursor ove r th e no wlin e:
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
This i nfor mati on i s ho we ver no t d ispl ayed as a f ield on
the t imel ine disp lay.
If you wa nt to p osit ion t he nowli ne to a given T C of the
timeli ne, typ e this tim eco de in the Nowli ne TC fiel d of the
Record er Ar ea a nd p ress ENTER.
6.5.9
AUDIO TRACK SELECTION AND SETTINGS IN THE TIMELINE
I NTRODUCTION
In the tim elin e disp lay, 6 tracks ar e visi ble: 1 v id eo track a nd 5 aud io tra cks. For
each a udio tra ck b utto n s are disp laye d on bot h sides of the disp laye d timeli ne
track.
These bu tton s allow c on troll ing som e inpu t and outpu t sett ings us ed glo bally f or
each tr ack, a ltho ugh e lement s plac ed on a track ca n alwa ys be t reated
indiv idua lly.
93
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
T RACK N AME AND A UDIO T YPE IN THE T IMELINE
The to p t rack repr esen ts the v ideo tra ck.
The ot her trac ks re pres e nt th e aud io t rack s whi ch can b e us ed in the tim el ine. U p
to 5 audi o tr acks are ava i lable .
The up per par t of th e Audio T rack bu tton s sh ow the nam e o f th e au dio t rack
facin g th e bu tton in the ti meline dis play : fr om A 1 t o A5.
The low er par t of the A udio Tra ck bu tton s sho w the au dio t ype o f the timeli n e
track. By defa ult, all th e audi o tr acks are set t o Ster eo. A rig ht-c lick o n each
Audio Trac k butto n displ ays a contex tual me nu fr om which you can se t th e audio
track type :
You can mute a tr ack b y clic king the corre spon ding Au dio T rack butt on . It wi ll
displa y t he f ollo wing ico n :
A UDIO T RACK S ELECTION FOR E DITING A CTIONS
The Trac k Sel ectio n ch eck box i s used to sel e ct the t racks to be t ak en into
accoun t whe n edi ting actio ns are per forme d (inclu ding play out , exp ort an d
render ing acti ons) .
If one Trac k Sel ectio n c heck bo x is clear ed be fo re the load ing o f a cl ip, you wil l
not b e ab le t o lo ad a udio on th is t imel ine trac k.
94
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Video and Audi o tr acks c an be sel ecte d by usi ng t he fo llowi ng s hort cuts :
Track
Activa tion Short cut
Video
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
All Au dio
+
+
+
+
+
+
A UDIO T RACK S ELECTION FOR THE O UTPUT
Introduction
Based on the Audi o Ty pe se lect ed a t ed it cre ation (fr om t he Ed it Pr opert ies
window) , out put track s t ypes ha ve be en se t and are dis play ed in the R ecorde r
pane.
From the t imel ine, a n Au dio Outp ut Mat rix is u se d to defi ne whic h time lin e track
will be ro uted t o whic h o utput t rack . This ma trix i s access ed by cl icki ng th e Audio
Matrix b utto n
, avai labl e only if th e Show Aud io Matrix Bu tton pa rame ter has
been e nabl ed in Xe dio M anager > P arame ter Prof i les > Clea nEdi t > Ti me lin e.
In case th e Audio Mat ri x button h as not en able d , all the aud io tra cks are output
on th e ou tput ste reo trac k 1.
The selec tion o f the out put trac k corres pond ing t o each audi o track is pe rforme d
throug h an a udio outp ut matrix . This matr ix is access ed by c lick ing t h e Audio
Matrix b utto n
. The Show Audi o Matr ix But to n parame ter mu st hav e been
enable d i n Xed io M anag e r > Pa rame ter Prof iles > CleanE dit > Tim eli ne.
In case th e Audio Mat ri x button h as not en able d , all the aud io tra cks are output
on th e ou tput ste reo trac k 1.
95
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Audio Output Matrix Overview
Timeline Tracks area
This a rea repr esen ts t he timeli ne track s wi th t heir audio typ e as thi s ha s be en se t
throug h t he Au dio T rack butto n co ntex tual menu s: ster eo or 5. 1.
Audio Output area
This a rea r epre sent s th e variou s tr acks to w hich y ou can out put the corre s pondin g
timeli ne tr ack as they have be en se t when c r eatin g the e dit ( from t he Edit
Proper ties win dow).
Matrix
To selec t the out put tra c k from which e ach time li ne track wi ll be pla yed, click on
an inter sect ion in th e gri d. Each sel ecti on is rep r esente d by an ora nge bul let. Thi s
is ta ken into acc ount for playou t, rend ering an d ex port acti ons.
96
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
Possible Matrix Displays
You w ill fin d b elow the possib le disp lay dep endi ng on th e a udio ty pe of the e dit
and t he t imel ine track s.
Stereo to Stereo
No add itio nal inf ormat ion is r eques ted .
5.1 to 5.1
No add itio nal inf ormat ion is r eques ted .
97
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Stereo to 5.1
If you s end a s tere o tim eline t rack on a 5. 1 out p ut trac k, yo u will have t o selec t
the c hanne ls from the 5.1 track on whic h yo u wa nt to ou tput the ste reo chan nels.
5.1 to Stereo
If you s end a 5 .1 ti meli n e track on a st ereo o utp ut trac k, yo u will have t o selec t
the c hanne ls from the 5.1 track you wan t to be out put o n th e st ereo cha nnel s.
Importa nt
You n eed to sele ct the c heck box on the righ t o f t he Aud io T rack but ton
if you wan t to ou tput t he corre spon ding a udio track. Ot herw ise, n o
materi al w ill be s ent to th e sel ecte d ou tput tra ck.
98
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
A UDIO R OUTING F OR S TEREO T RACKS
The Ste reo R outin g but ton al lows defi ning def a ult au dio rout ing o pti ons for a ll
new clip s added t o a ster eo track i n the tim elin e. These de faul t rout ing op t ions are
defin ed for eac h stere o track, and ar e not ava ilab le with 5.1 tr acks . If the butto n
text is o rang e, i t me ans t hat a rou ting opt ion has been d efi ned.
To de fine th e au dio rou ti ng, c lick th e b utto n t o op en th e De fau lt A udio Mod e dia lo g
box. T hen sele ct o ne of t he pos sibl e se tti ngs:
Once y ou h ave defi ned th e rou ting opt ions :
•
You wil l be as ked w heth er you wa nt t o appl y the m to the clip s pres ent i n the
timeli ne ( aft er co nfir ming your choi ce).
•
The op tion s wi ll autom atica lly be a ppli ed to t he new cli ps added to th e
timeli ne.
T RACK Z OOM
The Zoom butt on ex pand s the s elec ted a udio trac k in a Zo om vi ew. I n the Zoo m
view, you can perf orm th e fol lowin g ac tio ns:
•
Adjust cro ss f ades on tra nsiti ons (see 10. 2.7 on p age 18 0)
•
Adjust aud io leve ls o f cl i ps (se e 10 .4 on p age 183 )
•
View the c lip wav e forms generat ed via t he Get a udio wave form com man d in
the c onte xtua l me nu ( se e 10. 5.1 ‘How to Gener a te th e Wav efor m of an A udio
Elemen t’, on p age 185)
99
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
6.5.10 EDITING BUTTONS IN THE TIMELINE AREA
The time line bu tto ns allo w the users t o plac e and manipu late c lips on t he ti meline .
In the tab le belo w you will fin d a brief de scri p tion of th ese but tons b ut their
operat ion will be det aile d , wher ever nec essar y, in the f ollow ing sec tions .
Button
Keyboar d
Descri ption
Shortcu t
Perfor ming edi t ac tion s i n Inse rt m ode ( whit e
butto n) wi ll s hif t th e ex ist ing e lemen ts i n t he e dit
before th e se lect ed c lip i s plac ed into the edi t.
(togg le b etwee n
modes)
Perfor ming edi t ac tion s i n Over writ e mod e
(orang e bu tton ) me ans th at th e re sult of the
editi ng a ctio n wi ll r epla ce the cont ent of a n
exist ing edit .
When y ou d elet e a port io n of the time line wit h
the De lete & C lear opt io n act ive (whit e bu tto n),
the a rea from whic h th e e lement is dele ted will
remain empt y a fter the d eleti on.
When y ou d elet e a port io n of the time line wit h
the De lete & Sh ift opt ion acti ve ( orang e bu tto n),
any e lemen t lo cate d on t he ri ght of t he d elet ed
porti on wi ll b e sh ift ed t o t he le ft, so a s to rep lace
the d elet ed e lemen ts.
Only t he c lip s on sel ecte d tra cks w ill be s hif ted.
(togg le ON /OFF)
-
When t he B lank Fil l bu tt on is act ive in O verwr ite
mode, the medi a pl aced i nto t he t imel ine w ill fil l
in emp ty a reas of the tim eline .
When t he AF X bu tton is a ctive , th e de faul t au dio
transi tio n is aut omat ical l y adde d on eac h n ew
clip plac ed i nto the time li ne.
The de faul t a udio tra nsit i on ef fect is defi ned in
Xedio Mana ger: Sof tware > Par amet er P rofi les >
(Xedio )Clea nEdi t > Time l ine t ab:
Defaul tAud ioTr ansFx
-
When t he VF X bu tto n is a ctive , th e de faul t vi deo
transi tio n is aut omat ical l y adde d on eac h n ew
clip plac ed i nto the time li ne.
The de faul t a udio tra nsit i on ef fect is defi ned in
Xedio Mana ger: Sof tware > Par amet er P rofi les >
(Xedio )Clea nEdi t > Time l ine t ab:
Defaul tVid eoTr ansFx
100
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Button
Keyboar d
Descri ption
Shortcu t
Clicki ng t he M ark IN b utt on mar ks a n IN poi nt a t
the n owlin e po sit ion on t he tim elin e.
or
Clicki ng t he M ark OUT b utton mark s an OUT
point at the nowl ine posi t ion o n th e ti meli ne.
or
Clicki ng t he M ark C lip bu tton puts the mark IN at
the b egin ning of the firs t elemen t se lect ed a nd
the ma rk OU T at the en d of th e la st c lip sele cted .
Clicki ng t he M ark R eset butto n de lete s th e ma rk
IN and mar k OUT poi nts.
+
Clicki ng t he IN OUT Del e te bu tton del etes the
conten t o f th e ti meli ne b e tween the mark IN and
mark OU T on the sel ecte d tra cks ( chec k bo x in
front of the trac k).
The Se lect All but ton all ows se lect ing all the
timeli ne e leme nts from th e nowl ine posi tion on
the s elec ted trac ks (c hec k box in fron t of the
track) .
+
+
+
The CTR L + Sele ct Al l b utton all ows s elec ting
all t he t imel ine eleme nts up to the now line
posit ion on t he s elec ted t racks (che ck b ox i n
front of the trac k).
+
When a mark IN and mar k OUT are defi ned, the
SHIFT + Sel ect All but to n all ows s elec ting the
elemen ts (w hole el ement s) be tween the mark IN
and ma rk OU T po ints on t he se lect ed t racks .
The Sp lit butt on a llow s d ividi ng t he t imel ine
elemen ts i nto two part s a t the now line pos itio n.
101
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Button
Keyboar d
Descri ption
Shortcu t
The Bl ank C lear but ton a llows dele ting th e
common empt y zo nes on the s elec ted trac ks f rom
the n owlin e, prese rvin g t he syn chro niza tion
betwee n th e di ffe rent tra cks.
-
When a t le ast two time lin e elem ents are
select ed, the Left bu tton allows ali gnin g t he
select ed eleme nts on t he left .
It wi ll t ake the last el eme nt se lect ed a s th e
refere nce posi tion fo r th e left -ali gnmen t.
-
When a t le ast two time lin e elem ents are
select ed, the Righ t bu tto n all ows a lign ing the
select ed eleme nts on t he righ t.
It wi ll t ake the last el eme nt se lect ed a s th e
refere nce posi tion fo r th e righ t-al ignme nt.
-
The Ex tend but ton allow s exte ndin g or
shorte ning a c lip on the s elect ed t rack( s),
modify ing its IN o r OUT p oint to a pos itio n
defin ed b y a m ark IN o r mark OU T on the
timeli ne.
For mor e i nform atio n on t he ex tend fun ctio n,
refer to the sect ion 7.9. 3 ‘Exten ding or
Shorte ning a C lip’ , on pa ge 128 .
-
The Ex tend Stil l b utto n a llows:
• extend ing the IN poin t of a sel ecte d v ideo
elemen t as a sti ll fr ame (0% motion) up t o a
mark IN de fine d be fore th e IN p oin t.
• extend ing t he OUT poi n t of a selec ted vi deo
elemen t as a sti ll fr am e up to a mar k OUT
defin ed a fter the OUT poi nt.
For mor e in forma tion on t he Ext end S til l fun ctio n,
refer t o the se ctio n 7.9. 4 ‘Extend ing a Cl ip wit h a
Still Fram e’, on p age 130 .
-
The Ex tend Speed bu tto n all ows:
• extend ing the IN poin t of a clip u p to a mark IN
defin ed, w ith out m odif yin g its con tent .
• extend ing t he OUT poin t of a cli p up t o a mark
OUT de fine d, wi tho ut mo difyi ng i ts c onte nt.
The effe ct ach ieve d is a slow motio n or fas t
motion cli p.
For more in form atio n o n the func tion , refe r to
sectio n 7.9 .5 ‘Ex tend ing or Short enin g a Clip b y
Modify ing its Spee d’, on page 1 31.
102
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Button
Keyboar d
Descri ption
Shortcu t
-
The Co lor Inser t bu tton allows rep laci ng t he
timeli ne c onte nt by a col or fl ash betwe en a mar k
IN and mar k OUT def ined .
The f lash dura tion an d co lor ar e de fin ed b y ri ghtclicki ng the C olor Ins ert butto n an d se lect ing
Propert ies from the con t extua l men u.
-
The Aud io/V ideo Fx b utt on al lows:
• insert ing c olor s on the v ideo tr ansi tion o f the
next or pr evio us c ut ( See sect ion 8.2. 6)
• modify ing the audi o l evel s (See sec tion 10. 4)
• creati ng defa ult audi o tr ansit ions (See sec tion
10.2. 6)
Such audi o ef fect s c a n be perf orme d on
select ed cl ips, o n a whole aud io tr ack, or
severa l on es.
When you want to app ly the ef fect o n a who le
track, re move mar k IN or mark OUT, if any ,
and pla ce the n owli ne at the begi nnin g of th e
edit, cli ckin g th e Home k ey.
-
The Cue bu tton all ows ali gning aud io o r vi deo
events of dif fere nt t rack s on t he n owli ne or to the
cue po int s de fine d.
-
The ab but ton all ows i nv ertin g th e au dio clip s
betwee n tw o au dio trac ks , from the now line
onward s.
This o ptio n i s en able d, w hen yo u po sit ion the
nowlin e wh ere r eque sted , and sele ct tw o a udio
tracks fro m th e no wlin e.
-
The S butt on a llow s yo u t o rend er fast moti on
clips .
This b utt on i s en able d as soon as a fa st mo tio n
clip is d etec ted in t he tim eline .
Note
The use o f Shut tleP RO keys for edit ing fu nct i ons is de tai led in the
append ix 1 .
103
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
7. General Editing
7.1
MARKING POSITIONS ON THE TIMELINE
7.1.1
ADDING MARKS
Using the b utto ns d ispl a yed on the scre ensho t b elow, you c an ma rk po int s to e dit
accura tely on the tim elin e. Yo u ca n us e t hese m arks to p lace you r cl ips into the
timeli ne, but als o in man y oth er e diti ng a ctio ns.
The fo llow ing marks can be de fine d in the tim elin e :
Name
Descri ption
To def ine t he mark, …
Nowlin e
blue vert ical lin e, w hich
displa ys the curre nt
posit ion on t he t imel ine
click on the tim elin e ru le r wher e y ou w ant
to pl ace the nowl ine.
Mark IN
green vert ical li ne,
which disp lays the
posit ion of a mark IN
point
place the no wlin e a t t he r equest ed posi tion
red ve rtic al line , whi ch
displa ys the posi tion of
a mark OUT poin t
place the no wlin e a t t he r equest ed posi tion
Mark OU T
104
and c lick the Mark IN but ton
and c lick the Mark OUT b utton
.
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
7.1.2
ADDING MARK IN AND MARK OUT OVER SEVERAL
ELEMENTS
You can a lso us e the M ark Clip b utt on
point s be tween sel ecte d elemen ts.
to add a mark IN an d a mark O UT
Prior to cl ick
, cli ck an e lement bef ore wh ich y ou want t o pla ce th e mar k I N
and an el ement af ter w hi ch you wan t to pl ace the mark OU T.
7.1.3
REMOVING MARKS
The fol lowin g tabl e sum marize s how mar k IN an d/or mar k OUT can b e r emoved
from t he T imel ine:
To remo ve …
Proceed as fol lows:
a mark IN
Press
on the keyb oard .
Press
on the keyb oard .
a mark OUT
the ma rk I N
and ma rk OU T
Press
timeli ne.
on the keyboar d or click the
in the
105
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
7.2
SELECTING TECHNIQUES
7.2.1
SELECTING A CLIP
To sel ect an e leme nt o f a clip , mov e t he mo use on to it and cli ck.
The colo r of the se lect e d elemen t will ch ange t o a dark blu e (or as de fined i n
Xedio Mana ger, vi a So ft ware > Par amet er P rofi le s > ( Xedi o) C lean Edit : T L Colo rs
tab).
To se lect mul tip le e leme nts for a c ommon op erat ion, use the CTR L ke y f or no nconti guous el ement s an d SHIFT k ey f or c ont iguou s eleme nts.
7.2.2
SELECTING ELEMENTS DEPENDING ON NOWLINE OR MARK
POSITIONS
The follo wing ta ble show s how you can selec t ele ments from th e nowli ne, up to the
nowlin e or betwe en the mark IN and mark OU T. I n all cases , the sel ecti on will be
perfor med on e ntir e el em ents, not from th e mar k p ositi ons:
To sel ect all elem ents
Proceed as fol lows:
(entir e el ement s) …
from t he n owli ne
up to the end of the edi t,
from t he b egin ning of the edit
up to the now line ,
Click
or pres s
Click
+
press
+
.
or
betwee n th e ma rk IN and mark OU T
106
Click
+
press
+
or
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
7.3
PLACING CLIPS ONTO THE TIMELINE
7.3.1
INTRODUCTION
Issue 4.1.B
Various Methods to Add Clips to an Edit
There ar e many dif fere nt ways to add cl ips ont o your edi t. The ma in meth ods fo r
placin g a cli p to you r ed it are the foll owin g on es:
•
Draggi ng t he c lip int o th e Clip zone whe n th e Fi ll i con is ac tive .
This a dds the cli p to the end o f th e ti meli ne.
•
Draggi ng t he c lip from th e Clip zon e to a give n po sitio n in the edi t.
•
Draggi ng t he c lip from th e Play er t o a giv en p osit i on in the edi t.
Possible Positions of a Clip in an Edit
Depend ing on the Inse rt/ Overwri te m ode you hav e sele cted , yo u c an d rag a clip to
the f ollow ing pos itio ns i nt o the tim elin e:
•
at th e en d of the cl ip
•
on a tran siti on
•
on th e now line
•
on a m ark IN o r mar k OU T poin t
•
betwee n a mark IN a nd m ark OUT poi nts
•
anywhe re i n th e ed it
This w ill be e xpla ined in detai ls i n th e fo llow ing se ctions .
7.3.2
IMPORTANT PREREQUISITES
I NTRODUCTION
Before yo u drag a cli p into an edi t, you alw ays need to perfo rm the fo llowin g
actio ns:
1. Select th e In sert or Ove rwrite mod e wi th t he I ns ert/Ov erwr ite butt on in the
timeli ne:
2. Select th e cl ip t rack s to b e adde d t o th e ed it
This s ecti on p rovi des mo re de tail ed i nform atio n o n the se s teps .
107
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
I NSERT AND O VERWRITE M ODES
Before you drag a c lip o nto t he t imeli ne, you nee d to d efin e th e way you want t o
insert it . Two mod es a re availa ble : Ove rwri te o r I nsert.
You se lect th e mod e an d toggl e be tween bot h mo d es by :
•
clicki ng the Overw rite /In sert M ode i con (le ft i con above the time line di spla y)
•
pressi ng t he
keyb oard k ey.
Mode
Descri ption
Overwr ite
adds the medi a in the timeli ne, over writ ing the exis ting
media from th e s elec te d pos itio n. In othe r wo rds, the
media in the tim eli ne wi ll be remo ved fr om the insert ion
point by the dura tion of t he add ed m edia .
(defau lt)
(white )
Insert
(orang e)
adds the m edia i n the ti meline w itho ut ove rwrit in g exist ing
media a nd p ushe s fur ther right the exis ting elem en ts of the
timeli ne p lace d a fter thi s posit ion.
In thi s mod e, y ou ca n o nly in sert the medi a on the c lip
bounda ries whi ch are co mmon t o a ll selec ted tra cks. The
blank a reas are no t ta ken int o acc ount . The possib le
insert ion poin t i s sh own with a red arr ow on the t op of the
timeli ne:
108
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
S ELECTING THE T RACKS TO BE A DDED TO THE T IMELINE AND
THEIR A UDIO T YPE
The fo llow ing cons trai nts appl y whe n pl acin g a cli p on the time line :
•
It is not allow ed t o dr op a cli p ove r th e vi deo a r ea of the timel ine . Thi s rule
does n ot appl y to a c lip c ontai ning exc lusiv ely a v i deo e lemen t.
•
Timeli ne a udio tra cks m u st be sel ecte d (f rom t he c heck b ox).
•
Droppi ng clip s into th e timelin e is only po ssib le betwee n the same ty pes of
audio trac ks. Y ou wi ll n ot be able to d rop a st ereo t rack on a 5.1 tra ck.
Timeli ne au dio tr ack t ype must hav e bee n set acc ording to th e cli p tra ck a udio
type: if t he clip co ntai ns two 5.1 tra cks and 2 ste r eo tracks , they mus t be set
in th e ti meli ne.
•
The nu mber of cli p au d io tr acks must no t ex ce ed th e nu mber of avai l able
timeli ne tra cks. A c lip wi th 5 stere o trac ks wil l no t be dropp able i f a 5.1 tr ack
has be en s et in t he t imel i ne, a s on ly 4 ste reo trac k s will be avai lab le.
•
Only 5 au dio tra cks are a vailab le in the time line . I t is the refo re n ot poss ibl e to
place a cli p with more t han 5 au dio track s. I f th e clip cont ains m ore t ha n 5
audio tra cks:
o
When you drag a c lip f r om the Pl ayer o nto t he Timeli ne, on ly th e tra cks
select ed i n th e Pla yer w i th the tra ck se lect ion but tons w ill b e ad ded t o th e
edit:
o
When yo u dra g a c lip f ro m the Cl ips zone to th e timeli ne, only the a ctiv e
tracks of the cli p wi ll b e added to the edit .
109
Issue 4.1.B
7.3.3
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
TOOLS TO EASILY POSITION CLIPS IN THE TIMELINE
C LIP S HADOW D URING D RAG A CTION
When you plac e a clip within th e timel ine, a sh adow corre spon ding to t he cli p
(from ma rk IN t o mark OUT) is d ispla yed t o indica te wh ere th e cli p will be
posit ione d.
M AGNETIC E FFECT
When y ou plac e t he clip arou nd a ma rk (what ev er th e m ark), a mag neti c ef fect
helps you plac e t he c lip p recise ly a t t he r eques ted posit ion.
7.3.4
PLACING CLIPS IN AN EDIT DEPENDING ON THE REQUESTED
POSITION
P RELIMINARY S TEPS
Before yo u drag a cli p into an edi t, you alw ays need to perfo rm the fo llowin g
actio ns:
1. Select the I nser t or Ov erwrit e mode w ith the I nsert /Overw rit e but ton i n th e
timeli ne:
2. Select th e cl ip t rack s to b e adde d t o th e ed it
This s ecti on p rovi des mo re de tail ed i nform atio n o n the se s teps .
Note
When you plac e clips in I nsert mod e, you can on ly use the Fi ll but ton, or
place th e clip o n a trans i tion or at t he end of t he edit. Th e othe r opti ons
are no t a vail able .
A UTOMATIC C LIP I NSERTION AT THE E ND OF AN E DIT (F ILL )
If the Fi ll but ton i s acti ve
(orange d ispl ay) an d the cli p is dra gged t o th e
Clips zon e of th e Pr ojec t area , i t wi ll also be pla c ed on th e t imeli ne, at the end of
any ma teri al c urre ntly on the t imel ine.
P LACING A C LIP AT THE E ND OF AN E DIT OR ON A T RANSITION
To add a c lip at the end of th e la st c lip of the tim eline or on a tra nsit ion, drag the
clip to t he r eque sted pos i tion:
110
•
In Overwr ite mo de, yo u can use th e magn etic e ff ect to pl ace th e clip e xa ctly
after the las t fr ame or o n the tran siti on.
•
In In sert mode , an ora n ge dow n ar row
indica te w here the cli p wi ll be pla ced.
appe ars above the tim elin e to
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
P LACING A C LIP U SING THE N OWLINE , M ARK IN OR M ARK
OUT
The foll owin g tabl e prese nts the ma in opt ions t o define t he posi tio n of a cli p whe n
it is a dded to t he ti mel ine us ing t he no wlin e, the mar k IN o r the mar k OUT
posit ion. Thes e ac tio ns c an on ly b e pe rform ed i n t he Ove rwri te mo de.
To pos ition the IN p oint
Do the foll owing :
of the cli p …
• on the IN poi nt of a cli p i n
the e dit
Drag an d dro p the cli p st raigh t ont o the tran sit ion ,
or th e now line , an d re lea se th e mou se b utto n.
OR
• on th e now line in the edi t
• on th e mar k IN in the edi t
Drag and dr op the cl ip o n the left o f the mark IN ,
and re leas e t he mo use b utton .
• on th e mar k OUT in th e
edit
Drag and d rop t he cli p on the ri ght o f the ma r k
OUT and re lease th e mou se bu tton .
To pos ition the OUT poi nt
Do the foll owing :
of the cli p …
• on th e now line in the edi t
Drag and dr op the c lip straig ht on to the no wlin e
pressi ng the CTR L key. Then relea se the mo us e
butto n.
• on th e mar k IN in the edi t
While you p ress the CT RL key, dra g an d dro p t he
clip on the l eft of th e mark IN, and r eleas e th e
mouse butt on.
• on th e mar k OUT in th e
edit
While you p ress the CT RL key, dra g an d dro p t he
clip on the righ t o f t he mark O UT a nd r elea se t he
mouse butt on.
P LACING A C LIP A NYWHERE IN THE T IMELINE
To place t he cli p anywh e re in the ti meli ne, dr ag t he clip to t he req uest ed posit ion
in th e ti meli ne, and rele a se th e mou se b utto n.
During t he drag a ctio n, a shadow cor resp ondi ng t o the clip i s displ ayed t o indica te
the c lip pos itio n i n th e t i meline . Mo reov er, the ti mecode fi eld on the upp er le ft of
the t imel ine disp lays the mouse curs or.
111
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
P LACING A C LIP B ETWEEN M ARK IN AND M ARK OUT (F IT TO
F ILL )
A clip (or a p orti on of a clip be tween a m ark I N and park OU T defi ne d in the
player ) can b e drag ged t o the tim elin e betw een a define d mark I N and ma rk OU T
point s. T his feat ure is a ls o cal led F it t o Fi ll or fo u r-point edi t.
In case th e leng th of the clip dif fers f rom the l engt h betwee n the mark I N and mar k
OUT po ints on the time lin e, th e cl ip c an b e in sert e d in sever al w ays:
•
Drag and d rop th e cli p betwee n the ma rk IN an d mark OUT po ints on t he
timeli ne:
The IN po int of the cl ip m atches th e ma rk IN o n t h e tim elin e a nd t he clip le ngth
is mod ifie d.
•
Drag and d rop th e cli p betwee n the ma rk IN an d mark OUT po ints on t he
timeli ne w ith the CTRL k ey pre ssed :
The OUT po int o f the cli p match es the mark OU T on the t imel ine an d the clip
lengt h is modi fie d (f rom i ts IN poin t).
•
Drag and d rop th e cli p betwee n the ma rk IN an d mark OUT po ints on t he
timeli ne w ith the ALT k ey press ed:
The c lip is pla ced betw e en th e m arks on the ti m eline . Th e c lip len gth eq uals
the l engt h se t in the pl ayer b ut t he s peed is c alcula ted aut omati call y and
depend s on th e dur ati on betwee n th e t imeli ne m ar ks.
7.3.5
ADD A CLIP TO FILL IN A BLANK AREA IN THE TIMELINE
I NTRODUCTION
The Bla nk Fi ll mo de i s used t o pla ce c lips on t h e time line to f ill in ar eas of th e
timeli ne wher e there is no media pre sent . Even when the cli p is longe r than the
blank t o be fil led, t his m ode ensu res th e next c li p is not ove rwri tten . Thi s mode
will o nly work in combi na tion w ith the Over writ e m ode.
To ac tiva te the Blan k Fill mode , c lick the
orange .
b utton . Th e b utto n wi ll t urn
M ETHODS
Depend ing on t he e xpec t ed res ult , yo u ca n pr ocee d in thre e di ffer ent ways :
•
Drag t he c lip to be a dded to t he b egin ning of the b lank area :
The IN poi nt o f t he c lip is match ed t o t he b egin nin g of the blan k ar ea.
•
Drag t he c lip anyw here in the blan k ar ea
The IN poi nt of the cl ip t o be adde d will b e drop p ed where y ou hav e rel ea sed
the mo use.
•
Drag t he c lip in the blan k area , whi le p ress ing the CTRL ke y:
The OUT poi nt of the c li p to be adde d will be ma tched to t he end o f the b lank
area
112
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
•
Drag t he c lip in the blan k area , whi le p ress ing the ALT key :
If the cl ip i s…
Then…
greate r th an the hole in
the t imel ine
The clip speed w ill be decrea sed to m atch t he
blank area .
smalle r th an t he hole in
the t imel ine
The clip s peed w ill be increas ed to ma tch t h e
blank area .
The fo llow ing crit eria mu st be met :
• the par amet er “Ca n Acce lerat e ” mus t have been
enable d in Xe dio Ma n ager > So ftwar es >
Parame ter P rofi les > Cl e anEdit .
• the maxim al spee d, se t with the “Max Fa st
Motion Spee d ” pa ram eter, m ust not b e
exceed ed.
E XAMPLE
The fol lowi ng sc reen shot s show t he si tuat ion bef ore, d uring and afte r th e dragand-dr op ope rati on usin g the blank f ill op tion . In this cas e, the c lip is dr o pped at
the b egin ning of the blan k area .
Before
During
113
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
After
114
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
7.4
Issue 4.1.B
MOVING CLIPS OR ELEMENTS ON THE
TIMELINE
Note
The Ov erwri te a nd Inser t modes are also app lica bl e to m ovin g ac tion s.
7.4.1
MOVING A CLIP OR ELEMENT IN THE TIMELINE
To mov e a cli p fr eely on the t imel ine, sel ect it firs t (se e th e s ecti on 7 .2), a nd th en
drag it t o it s ne w po siti on .
The magne tic eff ect , tha t ‘stick s’ the el ement s when near th e nowli ne, m ark IN,
mark OUT and t he cli p edges on th e eleme nts al r eady pre sent on t he tim e line can
ease the m oveme nts of t he ed it e lemen ts.
Note
If an ele ment sel ecte d ha s oth er e lemen ts a ssoc ia ted wi th it ( for exam ple
the vi deo eleme nt f rom a cli p wit h th e as soci ated a udio elem ents ),
moving o nly one o f the elemen ts will d esyn chro n ize the ot her el ement s.
This w ill show on the tim eline by the asso ciat ed a udio turn ing red:
Refer to the se ctio n 7.7 .1 ‘Resy nchr oniz ing As s ociat ed Clip E leme nts’ ,
on pag e 1 22 t o re synch ro nize eleme nts.
7.4.2
MOVING AN AUDIO CLIP BETWEEN TRACKS WITHOUT
MODIFYING ITS HORIZONTAL POSITION
You can m ove a n aud io elemen t betw een t rack s witho ut mod ify ing i ts posit ion
compar ed to the o ther elemen ts of the clip . This wi ll pr even t fro m audio
desync hron izat ion.
To move an audi o ele ment b etwee n tr acks , withou t mod ify ing i ts h orizon tal
posit ion, pro ceed as foll o ws:
1. Select th e cl ip b y cl icki ng once with th e le ft b utto n of th e mou se.
2. Keep t he S HIFT key pres sed.
3. Drag t he c lip to the audi o track des ired .
115
Issue 4.1.B
7.4.3
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
MOVING SEVERAL ELEMENTS IN THE TIMELINE
You can us e the fo llow i ng keybo ard com bina tion to cut, co py and pa ste one or
more e lemen ts s elec ted i n the tim elin e.
You c an s elec t s evera l elemen ts u sing
the e lemen ts t o b e se lect ed.
Action
Cut
elemen ts
Copy
elemen ts
Paste
elemen ts
116
Keys
or
+ c l ick o n
Descri ption
+
remove s the sele cted el ements fr om
the edit an d keep th em in the
clipbo ard, in pre para tio n to past ing
them to a new loc at ion in the
timeli ne.
+
copies the s elec ted e le ments t o the
clipbo ard, in pre para tio n to past ing
them to a new loc ati on on the
timeli ne.
+
pastes the sel ecte d ele ments on th e
nowlin e. The e leme nt which was
locat ed f urth est lef t o n t h e tim elin e i s
pasted on th e nowl ine posit ion, the
other ones are pas ted f urther rig ht,
based on th eir ori gi nal posi tion
compar ed t o th e fi rst ele ment.
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
7.5
REPLACING CLIPS BY LINKED CLIPS
7.5.1
INTRODUCTION
Issue 4.1.B
Linked cl ips can have be en cre ated in seve ral way s, suc h as :
•
clips hav e been cre ated f rom gange d record er cha nnels in IPD irec tor and t hen
sent to X edio Sui te,
•
clips h ave b een cr eate d on seve ral re cord er ch an nels on an EVS v ideo se rver
and th en im port ed fr om the EV S ser ver t ab o f Xedi o Imp orte r or Me dia
Import er,
•
server rec orde r ch anne ls have bee n g anged fr om Xedio Mana ger (Lin X > E VS
Video Ser ver) , then a tra in is dragg ed from th e EVS Server su b- ta b of Me dia
Import er t o th e Med ia zo ne of the Proje ct a rea. C reati ng a clip from thi s tr ain
will c reat e a lin ked clip o n the gan ged recor der ch annel .
When su ch a cli p is use d in a n ed it, it c an e asil y be r epla ced by on e of it s
linked clip s. Yo u can th erefor e use a sequ ence record ed th roug h a di ffe rent
camera ang le.
7.5.2
HOW TO REPLACE A CLIP BY A LINKED CLIP
1. Select th e cl ip y ou wa nt t o rep lace .
2. Right- clic k on it to acces s the con text ual m enu:
3. Select Cli p > Angle and then one of t he g ange d c ameras .
The cl ip is re plac ed b y i t s lin ked clip .
117
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
7.6
DELETING CLIPS OR ELEMENTS FROM
THE TIMELINE
7.6.1
DELETION METHODS
There are seve ral w ays t o del ete m edia fro m th e e dit o n th e ti meli ne:
•
Deleti ng s elec ted (ent ire) eleme nts of a n e dit.
See th e se cti on 7 .6.4 .
•
Deleti ng p orti ons of an e dit s elec ted usin g th e ma rk IN and mark OUT poin t s.
See th e se cti on 7 .6.2 and 7.6. 3.
7.6.2
DELETION MODES
To sel ect the D ele tion m ode an d to ggle bet ween modes, you can clic k th e
butto n or pre ss
Icon
. The fol l owing tabl e br ief ly ex pla i ns th e two de lete mode s:
Keyboar d
Descri ption
Shortcu t
When y ou d elet e a port io n of the time line wit h
the De lete & C lear opt io n act ive (whit e bu tto n),
the a rea from whic h th e e lement is dele ted will
remain empt y a fter the d eleti on.
When y ou d elet e a port io n of the time line wit h
the De lete & Sh ift opt ion acti ve ( orang e bu tto n),
any e lemen t lo cate d on t he ri ght of t he d elet ed
porti on wi ll b e sh ift ed t o t he le ft, so a s to rep lace
the d elet ed e lemen ts.
Only t he c lip s on sel ecte d tra cks w ill be s hif ted.
Note
This m ode does n’t tak e into acc ount th e sy nch roniza tion be tween th e
diffe rent t racks a nd s o can easi ly caus e a desynch roni zati on of
associ ated cl ip e lemen ts.
118
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
7.6.3
DELETING PORTIONS OF AN EDIT
P ROCEDURE
To del ete a p orti on o f an edit on t he t imel ine, pro c eed as fo llows :
1. Select th e de leti on mo de you wa nt t o ap ply , us ing the
butt on.
2. Place a ma rk IN and mar k OUT to d efin e th e po rti on of the edi t t o be remo ved.
3. Do one of the fol lowin g:
o
Click
o
Press
.
+
The po rtio n o f th e ti meli n e betw een the mark IN an d mark OUT is r emove d.
The remai ning ti meli ne el ements on th e righ t of th e delete d area are sh ifte d left or
not, depe ndin g on the del etion mode sel ecte d.
E XAMPLE
In t he e xamp le below , t h e por tion of th e c lip ADL _CLP_0 91208 _1- 0 1 b etw een t he
mark IN and mark OUT is del eted as y ou p ress the IN OUT D elet e but to n. The
optio n Delet e & Shift is active duri ng the d elet io n, which m eans t hat th e materi al
on th e ri ght of t he m ark OUT is shi fted to the lef t after the Del ete acti on.
119
Issue 4.1.B
7.6.4
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
DELETING TIMELINE ELEMENTS
P ROCEDURE
There are var ious ways of dele ting ent ire elem ent(s) or a w hole cli p f rom th e
timeli ne.
To del ete one or m ore el ements in an e dit , pr ocee d as foll ows:
1. Select th e de leti on mo de you wa nt t o ap ply , us ing the
butt on.
2. Select the el ement s to b e delet ed, us ing CTRL o r SHIFT + clic k if you w an t to
select sev eral ele ment s.
3. Do one of the fol lowin g:
o
Press
on the keyb oard
o
Right- clic k in the ed it a n d sel ect C lip > De lete fro m the cont extu al m enu.
The se lect ed e leme nts ar e remo ved from the edi t.
The rema inin g time line e lement s on th e righ t of t he dele ted e lemen ts are shifte d
left if the De lete and S hift mode is ac tive an d if a blank are a is left on all the
tracks af ter the dele tion .
E XAMPLE
In the examp le belo w, b oth vide o and audio e le ments of a clip ar e delet ed using
the Dele te comm and in t he cont extu al menu . The Delete & Sh ift op tion i s active ,
which mean s t hat the ma teria l on th e r ight of th e mark OUT is shi fted to the l eft
after the del ete acti on.
120
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
121
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
7.7
TIDYING UP AND ORGANIZING THE EDIT
7.7.1
RESYNCHRONIZING ASSOCIATED CLIP ELEMENTS
When an a udio elem ent become s desy nchr oniz ed from it s ass ocia ted v ide o, it wi ll
turn r ed ( by d efau lt) and displa y t he o ffse t va lue:
Desync hroni zed Elem ent:
To re synch roni ze the ele ment, rig ht-c lick th e e le ment and sel ect Clip > Resync
form t he c onte xtua l me nu
7.7.2
REMOVING BLANK AREAS ON A TIMELINE
P ROCEDURE
When the edit cont ains common em pty a reas o n all the vide o and a udio tracks ,
you c an r emov e t hese us ing t he Blank Cl ear butt on
synchr oniz atio n be twee n the d iffe rent tra cks.
. Thi s op tion ke eps th e
To rem ove c ommon bla nk areas on a t imel ine, proc eed as fo llows :
1. Ensure t hat al l the tr acks are selec ted in t he tim el ine with t he Tra ck Sele ct ion
check box in fron t of eac h tra ck.
2. Positi on the nowli ne o n t he le ft o f th e b lank area t o be remov ed.
3. Click the Blan k Cle ar b ut ton
The co mmon empt y zo ne s are del eted .
122
or p ress
.
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
E XAMPLE
In th e ex ampl e be low, the B lank Clea r b utto n is u sed to remov e t he blan ks
common to all trac ks:
Before
After
7.7.3
ALIGNING ELEMENTS ON A REFERENCE ELEMENT
You ca n ali gn l eft or ri g ht one or m ore e leme nts on a r efer ence elem ent with t he
or
:
•
A left a lignm ent me ans you wil l alig n the IN poi nt of th e elem ents on th e IN
point of the refe renc e el e ment.
•
A right alig nmen t mean s you wil l ali gn th e OUT point o f th e elem ents on the
OUT po int of t he r efer enc e elem ent.
The el emen ts wh ich are a ligne d wil l ov erwr ite exis t ing ma teri al o n t he t imel i ne.
To rig ht o r l eft alig n el em ents on a ref eren ce e lem ent, proc eed as f ollow s:
1. Using CTRL + cl ick, sel e ct:
a. first the ele ment s to ali gn ,
b. last the re fere nce ele ment (on whi ch the ot her eleme nts sho uld b e
align ed).
123
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
2. Do one of the fol lowin g:
7.7.4
o
To ali gn left , cl ick the
o
To ali gn r igh t, c lick the
bu tton.
butto n.
SPLITTING AN ELEMENT IN THE TIMELINE
Clicki ng t he Sp lit butt on
or p ressi ng
will spl its any e lemen t at the
curren t posi tio n of the n owline . Only the el ement s on the tr acks t icke d w ith the
Track Sele ction che ck b ox wil l be spl it.
7.7.5
GROUPING ELEMENTS IN A SYNC GROUP
I NTRODUCTION
If a cli p h as eleme nts inc ludin g bo th vide o a nd au dio w hen plac ed on the ti meline ,
synchr oniz atio n betwe en the elem ents is m aint ain ed and any de sync hron iz ation is
shown by d ispl ayin g th e audio in red.
However , some time s it is necess ary to synch roni z e elemen ts on the t imeli ne that
has no pre viou s as soci ati on, f or e xampl e to add re al tim e sy nchr oniz ed a ud io to a
slow mo tion rep lay or k e ep a s ynch roni zed rela tio nship betw een a mus ic t r ack an d
certai n v ideo elem ents .
P ROCEDURE
To def ine a sy nchr oniz ed group of elem ents , pr oce ed as fol lows:
1. Select th e gr oup of e lem ents to b e sy nchro nize d.
2. Right cli ck on the mous e and se lect Cl ip > Syn c Grou p f rom the con te xtual
menu.
When th e gr oup o f syn c hroniz ed e lemen ts i s def ined, the audi o ele ment s which
are mov ed co mpar ed to the sy nchr oniz ed vi deo elemen t wi ll be dis pla yed as
desync hron ized elem ents (red) .
To se e th e g roup of a udio eleme nts gro uped and s ynchr oniz ed w ith a vid eo
elemen t, p ress SHIF T an d cli ck t he r eque sted vid eo el ement .
You can r emove a n ele ment fro m a sync grou p by rede fini ng th e syn c group
withou t t his eleme nt.
124
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
7.8
CUE POINTS
7.8.1
INTRODUCTION
The cue poi nts are re f erence ma rks tha t can be place d in the time c ode bar
wherev er nee ded i n th e edit. Their prim ary g oal i s to mar k the edit with a visual
flag an d, opt iona lly , a d escrip tion of the e vent , and the refo re to ea se th e access
to a prec ise posi tion on t hat e dit.
They are rep rese nted by a yellow tri angl e with the ir number wri tte n in them . Each
logged eve nt cont ains a t imecod e, a lab el a nd a d escrip tion .
7.8.2
HOW TO ADD CUE POINTS
To cre ate a cu e po int , pr oceed in one of t he f ollo wing w ays:
•
Positi on the now line wh ere y ou want to pl ace t he cu e p oint , p ress
follow ed b y a numb er o n the k eypad , a nd t hen pre ss ENTE R.
,
•
Right- clic k on th e tim eco de bar, and se lect Add C ue Point from t he con tex tual
menu.
To cre ate a cu e po int rap idly w hen an e dit is bein g play ed:
Press
+
125
Issue 4.1.B
7.8.3
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
HOW TO GO TO AND SELECT CUE POINTS
To go to a de fine d cu e po int:
•
Press the cue poin t n umb er on the key pad, and pr ess ENT ER.
To sel ect a sp eci fic cue p oint
•
Click the cue poin t o n th e Media bar .
The cu e po int will tur n pu rple w hen sele cted .
7.8.4
CONTEXTUAL MENU FOR CUE POINTS
The con tex tual menu of the ti meco de ba r giv es i n
addit ion s ome op tion s fo r the t ags a nd cue poin t s,
when t hey are sele cted .
To move the nowl ine t o t he cue poin t on whic h yo u
have rig ht-c lick ed, sel ect the Snap Nowli ne to Ite m
command . Yo u can also p ress the numb er
corres pond ing t o th e cu e poin t on the k eypa d a nd
valida te w ith ENTER .
To move the c ue p oint on whic h you have rig h tclicke d to t he now line posit ion, s elec t the Sn ap
Item t o Now line comm an d.
126
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
7.9
EXTENDING OR SHORTENING CLIPS
7.9.1
INTRODUCTION
It is possi ble to ex tend o r to shorte n the dur atio n of a clip pre viou sly add e d to the
edit, by mo dify ing t he IN or OUT p oint . The mate rial f rom t he or igin al me dia wil l
be used to ext end t he cl ip, if a vail able . The O ver write o r Inse rt mod es ar e taken
into acco unt in e xten d ac tions .
This c an b e do ne i n d iffe r ent wa ys:
7.9.2
•
using one of the Exten d editi ng b utto ns o n th e t im eline :
•
draggi ng the m edia on th e time line it self .
,
,
EXTEND MODES
Differ ent exte nd m odes a re ava ilab le to a chie ve s l ightl y di ffer ent resu lts:
Functio n
Functio n Name an d Des cripti on
Extend
The Ex tend but ton allow s exte ndin g or shor ten ing a cli p on
the s elec ted trac k(s), mo difyi ng i ts I N or OUT poin t to a
posit ion defi ned by a mar k IN o r ma rk OU T on the timeli ne.
See al so the sect ion 7.9. 3 ‘Ex tend ing or Sh orte nin g a Cl ip’ ,
on pag e 1 28.
Extend Sti ll
The Ex tend Stil l b utto n a llows:
• extend ing th e IN poin t of a select ed vide o eleme nt as a still
frame (0% mot ion) up to a m ark IN defi ned bef o re th e I N
point .
• extend ing the OUT poin t of a sel ecte d v ideo ele ment a s a
still fram e up to a ma rk O UT def ined aft er t he O UT poin t.
See als o the s ect ion 7 .9.4 ‘E xten ding a Clip with a S till
Frame’ , on pag e 13 0.
Extend Spee d
The Ex tend Speed bu tto n all ows:
• extend ing the IN p oin t o f a c lip up t o a mark IN defi ned,
withou t mo dify ing its cont ent.
• extend ing the OUT poi nt of a clip up to a mark OU T
defin ed, w ith out m odif yin g its con tent .
The ef fec t ac hieve d i s a slow mo tio n or fas t mo tio n cli p.
See al so t he s ecti on 7 .9. 5 ‘Ext endi ng o r Sh orte ni ng a C lip by
Modify ing its Spee d’, on page 1 31.
127
Issue 4.1.B
7.9.3
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
EXTENDING OR SHORTENING A CLIP
D EFINITION AND V ARIATIONS
The E xtend fu ncti on sho rtens or ext ends th e d ura tion of an elem ent or a c lip to a
mark IN or mark OUT defi ned, usin g th e co nten t of the o rigi nal m edia if ava il able.
If th e o rigi nal medi a d oe s not in clud e ad diti onal materi al, thi s wi ll not be possib le
to ex tend the sel ecte d el ements or clip .
You ca n pe rfor m on e of t he fo llowi ng a cti ons:
•
Extend the IN poin t o f a c lip
•
Extend the OUT poi nt o f a cli p
•
Shorte n th e IN poi nt of a clip
•
Shorte n th e OUT po int of a cl ip
H OW TO E XTEND OR S HORTEN A C LIP U SING THE E XTEND
B UTTON
Procedure
To ext end or s hort en s ele cted eleme nts or c lip, pro ceed a s f ollow s:
1. If re quir ed, chan ge t he O verwri te o r In sert mode cl icking th e
butto n.
2. Depend ing on w heth er yo u want to e xten d or sho rt en the se lect ed ele ment s or
clip on i ts I N or OUT poin t, do one of the fol lowin g:
a. To ext end the IN p oin t, p l ace a mark IN befo re t he IN poi nt to b e ex tend ed.
b. To exten d the OUT p oin t, plac e a mark OUT a ft er the OUT po int t o be
extend ed.
c. To sho rten the IN poin t, place a ma rk I N af ter the IN poi nt to b e sh orte ned.
d. To shor ten the OU T poi n t, pla ce a m ark OU T bef ore th e OUT poin t to b e
shorte ned
3. Select th e el ement s or cli p to be e xten ded or s hort ened.
4. Press the Exte nd bu tto n
.
The IN or OUT po int o f t he elem ents or cl ip tha t had to b e ext ende d or s h ortene d
has been mov ed and th e possibl e addit iona l mate rial has be en retr ieve d fr om the
origin al m edia .
Note
If ther e are b oth, an IN and an OUT poin t on th e edit, a popu p wind ow
will ask the ope rato r to choose to whi ch m ark h e wan ts t o e xten d t he
elemen t se lect ed.
128
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
Example
In the exam ple bel ow, yo u work in Overw rite mod e and want to exte nd the I N point
of th e cl ip c alle d ‘C lip3 ’.
To do thi s, yo u sele ct th e clip to b e exte nded and place a m ark IN wh ere y o u want
the IN po int of t he c lip to be e xten ded to.
The sc reen shot bel ow sh ows th e ex tend ed c lip:
H OW TO E XTEND OR S HORTEN A C LIP U SING A D RAG
O PERATION
To exte nd or shor ten s el ected e leme nts o r a cl ip on the IN or OU T poi nt using a
drag o pera tion , pr ocee d as fo llows :
1. If re quir ed, chan ge t he O verwri te o r In sert mode cl icking th e
butto n.
2. Select th e el ement s or cli p to be e xten ded or s hort ened.
3. Positi on the mous e cu rso r ove r th e 3 lin es s ymbo l near the IN or OUT p oin t of
the c lip and drag the cli p edge to t he r equi red posi tion on t he t imel ine.
4. Releas e th e mo use.
Example
In t he examp le below , y ou wo rk in O verwr ite mo de an d w ant to ext end t he OUT
point of the clip cal led ‘C lip3’ .
129
Issue 4.1.B
7.9.4
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
EXTENDING A CLIP WITH A STILL FRAME
The Exte nd Sti ll fu nct i on repe ats o nly th e fir s t/las t fram e of a c lip u p to the
modifi ed I N or OUT poin t.
To ext end a cl ip w ith a s t ill f rame, pro ceed as fol lo ws:
1. If re quir ed, chan ge t he O verwri te o r In sert mode cl icking th e
butto n.
2. Select th e vi deo eleme nt to be ext ende d wi th a sti l l fram e.
3. Do one of the fol lowin g:
a. To exten d the IN po int, p lace a mark I N befor e th e IN point o f the sel ecte d
elemen t.
b. To exten d the OUT p oin t, plac e a mark OUT a ft er the OUT po int of t he
select ed eleme nt.
4. Click the Exte nd St ill but ton
.
The clip is e xten ded and the exten ded are a is fil l ed in with th e firs t frame of the
clip (wh en the IN po int h as been ex tend ed) or wit h the last f rame of t he cli p (whe n
the OU T po int has been e xtende d).
Note
Increa sing the len gth of a vide o el ement by drag ging t he e leme nt ed ge
and pr essi ng S HIFT sim ultan eous ly wi ll exte nd t he el ement wit h a sti ll
frame.
This is done in th e same way as t he nor mal Ex te nd oper atio n exp lain ed
in ‘How t o Ext end o r Sh orten a Clip U sing a Dr ag Oper atio n’, o n pag e
129.
130
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
7.9.5
EXTENDING OR SHORTENING A CLIP BY MODIFYING ITS
SPEED
The Exte nd Spe ed fun ct ion kee ps th e orig inal le ngth of the c lip bu t modi fies th e
play s peed to fit in the modif ied IN o r OUT po int. In t his case a re nd ering is
needed .
To ext end or s hort en a cl ip by modi fyin g i ts s peed , proce ed a s f ollow s:
1. If re quir ed, chan ge t he O verwri te o r In sert mode cl icking th e
butto n.
2. Select the vid eo el emen t to be exte nded or s hort ened b y mod ifyi ng t he p lay
speed.
3. Do one of the fol lowin g:
a. To ext end the IN p oin t, p l ace a mark IN befo re t he IN poi nt to b e ex tend ed.
b. To exten d the OUT p oin t, plac e a mark OUT a ft er the OUT po int t o be
extend ed.
c. To sho rten the IN poin t, place a ma rk I N af ter the IN poi nt to b e sh orte ned.
d. To shorte n the OUT poi n t, place a mar k OUT bef ore the OUT poi nt to be
shorte ned
4. Click the Exte nd Sp eed butto n
.
The cl ip i s ex tend ed o r shorte ned with out addi ng or re movin g vi deo mate rial b ut
its p lay spee d is ada pted to f it b etwe en t he m odif i ed IN or O UT po int .
Note
Increa sing or red ucin g t he leng th of a v ideo el ement by dragg ing t he
elemen t ed ge a nd p ress i ng ALT simu ltan eous ly w ill c reat e a fast or slow
motion cli p.
This is done in th e same way as t he nor mal Ex te nd oper atio n exp lain ed
in ‘How t o Ext end o r Sh orten a Clip U sing a Dr ag Oper atio n’, o n pag e
129.
131
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
7.10 CREATING FAST MOTION CLIPS
7.10.1 VARIOUS WAYS TO CREATE FAST MOTION CLIPS
Fast m otio n cl ips can be create d us ing one of the follow ing meth ods:
1.
2.
Method
See se ctio n
Defini ng t he s peed fro m t he cl ip c onte xtua l
menu, with the Spe ed co mmand.
7.10. 2 ‘Mo dify ing the
Playba ck S peed of a Cl ip
Using the Spee d Comm a nd’,
on pag e 1 32.
Using the Exte nd Sp eed butto n
7.9.5 ‘Ex tend ing or
Shorte ning a C lip by
Modify ing its Spee d’,
on pag e 1 31
3.
Draggi ng t he t rans itio ns while pres sing the
ALT key
7.9.5 ‘Ex tend ing or
Shorte ning a C lip by
Modify ing its Spee d’,
on pag e 1 31
4.
Using the Fit to F ill feat ure (a lso call ed 4point edi t)
In ‘P laci ng a Clip Be twee n
Mark IN an d Mar k OUT (F it
to Fi ll)’ , on pag e 11 2.
7.10.2 MODIFYING THE PLAYBACK SPEED OF A CLIP USING THE
SPEED COMMAND
P ROCEDURE
To chang e the speed of a clip, s elec t the v ideo elemen t of th e cli p to change ,
right- clic k it, and s elec t Speed fr om th e cont extu al menu . You c an do o n e of the
follow ing:
•
132
Select a prese t sp eed (fo r slow mot ion clip s) i n th e ava ilab le l ist
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
•
Click the XX.Y% opt ion and en ters the req uire d playba ck s peed in the di alog
box t hat open s.
R ESULT
Once th e spe ed h as be en chan ged , the leng th of the vide o ele ment is adapte d
accord ingl y and will sho w a squa re p atte rn to in dicat e the clip spe ed ha s been
adjus ted.
The mo difi ed s peed is dis played nex t t o th e el eme nt nam e:
In Ove rwri te mo de, thi s may rem ove mate rial aft e r the cli p.
When the c lip s peed e xc eeds 10 0% , you need t o render the cl ip, us ing t h e
butto n. Fo r mor e in form ation on fast moti on c li ps, re fer to t he s ecti on 7.10 .3
‘Rende ring Fas t Mot ion C lips’ , on pag e 13 3.
7.10.3 RENDERING FAST MOTION CLIPS
You sho uld r ende r fas t motion clip s: Th e Ren dering butt on
is enab l ed
above the time line as soo n as a fa st mo tio n cl ip i s detec ted in t he t imel ine.
When yo u che ck an edi t with f ast m otio n cl ips t hat ha ve no t ye t bee n r endere d,
the f ollow ing mess age w il l be disp laye d:
Select ing Yes w ill r ende r the f ast m otio n cl ips i m mediat ely, sel ecti ng No will l eave
them as such (no t ren de red). T he t rans codi ng co dec us ed fo r the ren deri ng of a
fast m otio n c lip is s et i n Xedio Mana ger.
The na me o f th e re nder e d fil e fo llow s th e pa tter n below:
FM_IdMediaOrigin_tcInMedia_tcOutMedia_speed_GUID_[lr/
hr].[ext] where:
IdMedi aOrig in
= ID o f t he o rigi nal medi a
tcInMed ia
= TC I N (i n HHMMS SFF)
tcOutMe dia
= TC OU T (i n HHMM SSF F)
speed
= Spee d (i n %)
GUID
= Uniq ue i dent ifi er (G UID )
lr/hr
= Reso luti on: eit her lr ( lo -res) or h r (h i-re s)
133
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
.ext
= File fo rmat depe ndin g on th e co dec type
Note
Before la unch ing a Fast Motion Rend erin g proce ss, when work ing wit h
the low re solu tion , you n eed to mak e sure t he hig h-reso luti on med ia fil es
are a lso avai labl e on the main s tora ge.
If the hig h-re solu tion f ile is missing , a popu p win dow appe ars to in form
you th e hig h-re solu tion fi le is n ot a vail able . You n eed to rest ore this file
from t he A rchi ve b efor e l aunchi ng the rende ring .
134
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
7.11 TRIMMING EDIT POINTS ON THE
TIMELINE
7.11.1 DEFINITION AND ACCESS TO TRIM AREA
The Trim f unct ions (als o called R olle r func tio ns) consis t of ad just ing t h e IN or
OUT poi nt o f a t imel in e eleme nt o r cl ip. T his funct ion is us ed t o fi ne- tun e
transi tio ns b etwee n tw o e lement s af ter you have p erform ed t he f irst rou gh c uts.
The Tr im fu ncti on w ill sh orten or l engt hen the el ement that is in t rim m o de. Th e
lengt h of the fol lowi ng o r previo us e leme nt w ill be i mpacte d in Ove rwrit e mo de.
To disp lay th e Trim area , press the
button loca t ed betw een th e Pla yer
and Reco rder areas . If a trim is n ot al lowed at a n edit p oint , the b utt ons will no t
be ac tive .
7.11.2 OVERVIEW ON THE TRIM FUNCTIONS
The fo llowi ng t able show s an ov ervi ew on the vari ous bu tton s ava ilab le i n t he Trim
area. R efer t o sec tion ‘A ctiva ting the Tr im Func ti ons’ on page 1 36 to kno w how to
activa te the func tion s.
Button
Descri ption
The Trim OUT bu tton all ows the user t o mod ify t he OUT po int o f the
clip befo re t he t rans itio n.
The Trim IN bu tton allow s the us er to m odif y the IN poin t of t he cl i p
after the tra nsit ion.
This Rol l Trans ition b ut ton all ows the u ser to m odify bo th the O UT
point o f the cli p befo re the tran sit ion AND th e I N point of t he cli p
after the tra nsit ion.
During a tri m ope rati on , the t wo ce ntra l cou nt ers pro vide prec ise
inform atio n on the num be r of frame s th at w ill be tri mmed.
The me anin g of the fi gur es di ffer s whe ther you ar e per formi ng:
• a Trim OUT, Trim IN, Rol l Trans itio n on one ha nd
• a Roll Cli p on the ot her h and
The Sa ve b utto n co nfir ms and appl ies the trim ope ratio n to the edi t.
The Can cel but ton canc e ls th e tr im o perat ion .
The Rol l Cl ip bu tto n al l ows th e use r to modi fy t he IN and the O UT
point s of the sel ecte d cl i p, le avin g it s le ngth unc h anged.
135
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Button
Descri ption
The Match Fr ame but to n allows th e user to r etriev e the ori gina l
media that cont ains the i mage d ispla yed in t he Re corder and load thi s
same im age in the Play er .
The RET bu tton al lows th e use r to loa d, in the Pla yer, the EVS Serve r
record tra in that con tain s the image dis play ed in t he Rec orde r.
7.11.3 TRIMMING OR ROLLING AROUND THE CLIP TRANSITION
I NTRODUCTION
The thr ee u pper butt ons make i t pos sibl e to tri m aroun d a c lip t rans iti on. Th e
follow ing tab le d escri bes what t he b utt ons are use d for .
Button
Descri ption
The Trim O UT but ton a ll ows the u ser t o modi fy t he OUT po int o f the
clip befo re t he t rans itio n:
• by add ing a f rame to it w hen yo u c lick the but ton.
• by remo ving a fr ame t o it whe n yo u pre ss SH I FT and clic k the
butto n sim ulta neou sly.
The Trim I N but ton al lo ws the us er to mo dify th e IN poin t of th e cli p
after the tra nsit ion:
• by add ing a f rame to it w hen yo u c lick the but ton.
• by remo ving a fr ame t o it whe n yo u pre ss SH I FT and clic k the
butto n sim ulta neou sly.
This Rol l Tran siti on but ton all ows th e user to m odify b oth t he OUT
point of t he c lip befo re th e tran siti on AN D the IN p oint o f th e cl ip a fter
the t rans itio n.
This f unct ion ‘ro lls’ the tr ansit ion:
• on th e ri ght when you cli ck th e bu tton .
• on the le ft whe n
simult aneo usly .
yo u
press
SH IFT
an d
click
t he
but ton
A CTIVATING THE T RIM F UNCTIONS
These b utto ns are only availa ble w hen th e no wline i s loc ated o n a tr ansit io n
common to all sele cted trac ks. For each tra ck unus ed o n th e tr ansi ti on, t he
corres pond ing Trac k Se l ection che ck b ox mu st b e cle ared .
When yo u fi rst use o ne of the Trim fun ctio ns, it change s th e co nfig urat io n of t he
Player and the Rec orde r previe w win dows :
136
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
•
The Pl ayer dis play s th e l ast f rame of the clip bef o re th e tr ansi tion .
•
The Re corde r di spla ys th e fir st f rame of the clip af ter t he t rans itio n.
Issue 4.1.B
H OW TO T RIM A ROUND THE C LIP T RANSITION
To tri m ar ound the cli p tr ansit ion, pro ceed as foll o ws:
1. Place the nowl ine on t he transi tio n yo u wan t t o tr i m.
The Tr im b utto ns b ecome acti ve.
2. Click the Trim but ton cor respon ding to the req uest ed tr im ac tion .
The la st frame of the cli p befo re t he t rans itio n is l oaded ont o th e Pl ayer .
The f irst fram e of th e cl ip afte r th e tr ansi tion is loa ded on to the R ecor der.
The co unte rs a re i niti ali z ed to 0.
3. Click th e requ este d Trim button a s many ti mes a s the numb er of fr ames you
want t o t rim t he trans iti o n.
The up per coun ter spec ifi es th e num ber of frame s that w ill be
added to (move to righ t) or rem oved from (mo ve t o lef t) t he e nd o f
the c lip befo re t he t rans it ion.
The lo wer coun ter spec ifi es th e num ber of frame s that w ill be
added to (move to lef t) o r remov ed f rom ( move to r ight) the
beginn ing of the clip af te r the tra nsit ion.
4. Once t he trim acti on h as been d efi ned, you can
o
confir m th e tr im a ctio n by clic king
o
reini tial ize the trim ope ra tion by c lick ing
When y ou c onfi rm t he t r im act ion , it is app lied t o the rel evan t cl ip, the counte r
inform atio n di sapp ears .
7.11.4 ROLLING A CLIP
I NTRODUCTION
The bu tton make s it pos sible to r oll a cl ip, w hich means to m odif y th e IN and th e
OUT po ints of the sele cte d cli p, l eavi ng i ts l engt h unchan ged.
This f unct ion ‘ro lls’ the cl ip:
•
on th e le ft w hen you clic k the butt on:
This ad ds fr ames a t the beginn ing o f the clip and remove s the s ame nu mbe r of
frames at the end .
•
on th e ri ght when you pre ss SHI FT an d cl ick the b utton simu ltan eous ly:
137
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
This rem oves frame s at t he begi nnin g of t he cl ip a nd adds the s ame num be r of
frames at the end .
A CTIVATING THE R OLL C LIP F UNCTION
The Roll Cli p butt on is o nly avai labl e when the n owline is l ocat ed on a tr ansit ion
common to all sele cted tr acks, and when the cli p t o be roll ed i s se lect ed.
When y ou firs t u se the R oll C lip but ton, it cha nge s the co nfig urat ion of the Play er
and t he Re cord er p revi ew windo ws:
•
The Pl ayer dis play s th e fi rst f rame of the clip to be roll ed.
•
The Re corde r di spla ys th e las t fr ame o f t he c lip to be r olle d.
H OW TO R OLL A CLIP
1. Place the nowl ine befo re the c lip you w ant to roll a nd se lect the cli p.
The Ro ll C lip butt on b ec omes a ctiv e.
2. Click the Roll Clip bu tton :
The f irst fram e of th e cl ip is l oade d on to t he P laye r.
The la st frame of the cli p is l oade d on to t he R ecor der.
The co unte rs a re i niti ali z ed to 0.
3. Click th e Roll Cli p butt o n as many time s as the n umber of fr ames yo u wan t to
roll the clip .
The up per counte r sp eci fies the numbe r of fram e s the IN p oint of
the c lip will be shif ted t o the lef t (n egat ive valu e) or to the righ t
(posit ive valu e).
The lo wer coun ter spec if ies t he n umber of fram e s the OUT poin t
of the cli p wil l be shi fted to th e le ft ( posi tive valu e) or to th e ri gh t
(negat ive valu e).
4. Once t he r oll act ion has been d efi ned, you can
o
confir m th e ac tion by clic king
o
reini tial ize the oper atio n by cl ickin g
When you co nfirm t he a ction , it is app lied t o th e clip, th e coun ter inf or mation
disapp ears .
Note
Please ref er t o th e ke yb oard s hort cuts ref eren ce chart app ende d to thi s
user m anua l fo r de tail ed assign ment s.
138
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
7.11.5 RETRIEVING THE SOURCE OF AN EDITED IMAGE
The ima ges o f the edi t are pre view ed in the R ecorde r are a. Yo u can use th e
Match F rame but ton acc essibl e i n th e Tri m ar ea to d ispl ay t he s ource of one of
those i mages in th e Pla yer, an d to ha ve th e ent ire cor respo ndin g ori gina l media
availa ble .
To ret riev e th e so urce of an ed ited imag e, proce ed as f ollow s:
1. Displa y th e de sire d im ag e in the Recor der area .
2. Click th e Match Fr ame button in t he Trim ar ea or press t he Back s pace
keyboa rd k ey.
139
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
8. Advanced Video
Editing
8.1
INTRODUCTION
The advan ced vid eo edit i ng chapte r will cov er the effects wh ich can be ad ded to
video cli ps, eith er o n tr an sitio ns, or o n th e cl ip e le ments them selve s.
All th ese e ffec ts ca n be d efine d via the clip cont ex tual me nu. T he c onte xtua l menu
is ava ila ble w hen you sel ect a vid eo e lemen t, and right- clic k on it .
8.2
VIDEO TRANSITION EFFECTS
8.2.1
WAYS TO ADD VIDEO TRANSITION EFFECTS
A UTOMATIC V IDEO T RANSITION E FFECTS
Once you cl ick th e
but ton to act ivat e the VFX functio n, a defa ult vi d eo
transi tio n is ad ded to ea ch new c lip p lace d int o the ed it. By def ault , the defau lt
video tra nsit ion is a mix .
You can mo dify the de f ault vi deo tr ansi tio n eff ect, as d escr ibed in the sectio n
8.2.2 ‘How to Modi fy t he Defaul t Vi deo Tran siti on Effec t ’, on p age 141.
M ANUAL V IDEO T RANSITION E FFECTS
You can a dd tra nsit ion e ffect s ‘man uall y’, ei ther to a spec ific tran siti on o r to all
transi tio ns l ocat ed b etwe en a defi ned m ark IN a nd mark OUT.
The fo llowi ng v ideo tran s ition effe cts are a vail abl e: Cut , Mix , Wipe , Bor de r Wipe,
Dip to Col or, RTD E ffec t.
To be able to d efin e tra nsiti on eff ects , you wil l right-c lick t he vid eo elem ents a s
140
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
follow s:
When yo u ri ght-c lick …
The tr ansit ion effe ct w il l be appli ed t o …
near the IN or OUT poin t
of a clip
the t rans itio n ne ares t to t he mou se c ursor .
betwee n a defi ned mark I N
and ma rk OU T
all t he t rans itio ns b etwe e n the mark s.
This w ill give you acce s s to t he c onte xtua l men u and to t he (L eft/ Right ) Video
Transi tion comma nds.
You ca n al so re move th e prev ious ly d efin ed t ra nsiti on e ffec ts cl icki ng t he Cle ar
All su b-com mand in the c ontex tual menu .
For mor e inf orma tion on how to defi ne th e tr ansi t ion ef fect s, re fer to th e sectio n
8.2.3 ‘How to Appl y Vi de o Tran siti on E ffec ts M anu ally’ , on pag e 14 1.
For mo re i nform ati on o n t he var ious ty pes of trans i tion effe cts, re fer to t he sectio n
8.2.4 ‘Po ssib le V ideo Tra nsiti on E ffec ts’, on page 143.
8.2.2
HOW TO MODIFY THE DEFAULT VIDEO TRANSITION EFFECT
The de faul t tra nsit ion is defin ed in Xedi o Man age r: Sof tware > Pa ramet er Profil es
> (Xed io)C leanE dit > T im eline tab : De faul tVid eoTr ansFx.
However , yo u ca n mo dify the defa ult vide o tr ansi ti on ef fect as foll ows:
1. Right- clic k th e ic on a nd s elect Prop erti es.
The Vi deo Tran siti on E ffe ct win dow is d ispl ayed .
2. Specif y t he re ques ted def ault tran siti on e ffec t
3. Click OK.
The new tra nsit ion effe ct is now the def ault tra ns ition asso ciat ed w ith y ou r user
profi le.
8.2.3
HOW TO APPLY VIDEO TRANSITION EFFECTS MANUALLY
To app ly v ideo tra nsit ion effec ts t o on e or sev eral transi tio ns, proc eed as f o llows:
1. Select th e tr ansi tion s wh ere t o ap ply the effe cts i n one of the foll owin g wa ys :
o
To defi ne an ef fec t on a single t rans itio n, po siti o n the mou se cur sor ne xt
to th e vi deo tran siti on o n which you wan t to add th e eff ect.
o
To defi ne an effe ct on s everal tran siti ons, add a mark IN a nd ma rk OUT
beyond the re levan t t rans ition s.
2. Do one of the fol lowin g:
o
Right- clic k to acce ss t he conte xtua l me nu an d se lect the r eque sted eff ect
type in t he ( Left / Ri ght) Video Trans itio n com ma nd.
141
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
o
Press
.
The Vi deo T rans itio n Eff ects w indow ope ns. In thi s wind ow, you can stil l
select an other ef fect . Th e fie lds w ill be adap ted a ccordi ng t o t he s elec ted
effec t. T he d efin itio n o f t he tr ansi tion s whe re t he effec t wi ll b e ap plie d, i n t he
Area g roup box , ca nnot b e modi fied .
3. In th e V ideo Tran siti on Effe cts wind ow, fill in the t rans itio n p arame ter s to
specif y the dur atio n, p ositi on and spe cifi c co nfigu rati on of the tr ans ition
effec t.
4. Click OK.
A yell ow v erti cal line is a dded o n t he t rans itio n wh ere t he e ffec t ha s be en a dded:
142
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
8.2.4
POSSIBLE VIDEO TRANSITION EFFECTS
This sect ion pre sent s t h e var ious tr ansi tion ef fec ts t hat can be sel ecte d f rom t he
contex tua l menu. For al l effects , a specif ic Vide o Transit ion Effe ct win dow will
be di spla yed to spec ify the v ario us p aram eters , such as d urat ion, po siti on, a n d
possib ly o ther con fig urat i on par amet ers.
N ONE
This o ptio n re sets th e tr a nsiti on i nto a cu t.
M IX
The Mi x tr ansi tion pro vid es a diss olve eff ect from the c lip to the left of the joint to
the c lip to t he r ight of the join t.
This o ptio n wi ll o pen a d i alog box to d eterm ine the param eter s fo r th e Mi x e ffect .
You ne ed to d efin e:
• the d urat ion in f rames
• the p osit ion of t he m ix:
o before cu t: o n th e cl ip b e fore the join t
o center ed: cen tered on th e joi nt
o after cut : on the cli p a fter the join t
W IPE
The Wipe tra nsit ion is a gradua l spati al tra nsi tion fro m one vide o so urce to
anothe r, in whi ch a ver tical or ho rizo ntal b orde r moves acro ss the sc r een, to
gradua lly rep lace th e l as t ima ges of the fir st clip with the fir st image s o f t he ne xt
clip.
This o ptio n wi ll o pen a d i alog box to d eterm ine the param eter s fo r th e Wi pe effec t:
143
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
In ad diti on t o th e e ffec t d urati on a nd p osit ion, you need to s peci fy:
•
the tr ansi tion wid th, i.e. the t hick ness of t he l i ne whi ch se para tes the clip
before and af ter the join t.
•
the dir ecti on, i .e. f rom and to wh ere t he las t i mage of t he fi rst c lip wi ll be
wiped by t he firs t ima ge of th e ne xt c lip.
B ORDER W IPE
This i s a w ipe e ffec t, o n which a col ored bord er i s added to d elim it t he wi p e effe ct
on th e ima ge.
This opti on will op en a d i alog box to det ermi ne the para mete rs for the Bor d er Wi pe
effec t:
You ca n sp ecif y:
144
•
the b order wid th i n t he Tr ansiti on Wi dth fiel d
•
the bor der c olor , usi ng a color c hart , whi ch ope n s when y ou cl ick th e col ored
rectan gle in the Line Col or fie ld.
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
D IP T O C OLOR
The Di p to Color ble nds the firs t cl ip i nto a se le cted c olor , a nd t hen ble nds t he
color in to the ne xt cli p. A typica l use woul d be t o mix to white i n betwe e n clips in
an in terv iew o r as a d ip t o bla ck i n an edi t.
This o ptio n wi ll o pen a di alog b ox t o de term ine the param eter s fo r th e Dip t o Colo r
effec t:
In ad diti on t o th e e ffec t d urati on a nd p osit ion, you need to s peci fy:
•
the co lor to b e use d in t he tra nsit ion from a ba si c colo r pa lett e, wh ich op ens
when y ou c lick the col ore d rec tang le i n th e Col or f ield.
•
the leng th of the ef fect appli ed on the fir st cli p ( Length In f ield) a nd on the
second cli p (L ength Out field ).
C USTOM
This al lows t he sel ecti on of a tran siti on be tween the cli ps wit h a gra phic “k eyed ”
over i t a s in the exam ple below.
When the cus tom menu i s select ed it shows a su bmenu to cho ose ei ther an effec t
alread y used on t he ti meline or t o find an e ff ect file t o load us ing a normal
windows ty pe f ile sear ch.
145
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Note
The fil es fo r the c usto m wipes mu st ha ve alr eady been imp orte d int o the
databa se. Plea se s ee the RTD se ctio n o f Med ia Im porter ta b to do this .
8.2.5
REMOVING TRANSITION EFFECTS
You can r emov e the tran sitio n eff ects that h ave b een def ined in th e same way a s
you ha ve d efi ned them, t hat i s to say :
1. Select the tra nsit ions on which to r emove the eff ects i n on e of the foll ow ing
ways:
o
To remo ve a n ef fect on a singl e tr ansi tion , po siti o n the mouse cur sor n ext
to th e vi deo tran siti on o n which you wan t to cle ar t he ef fect .
o
To remo ve th e eff ects on severa l tr ansi tion s, ad d a mark I N and mark O UT
beyond the re levan t t rans ition s.
2. Right- clic k and sel ect (L eft / Right ) Video Tr an sition > Cl ear Al l from the
contex tua l men u.
8.2.6
INSERTING BLOCKS OF COLOR FRAMES
You ca n in sert one or mo re fra mes of a sel ecte d c olor betwe en t wo c lips .
To do thi s, p rocee d as fo l lows:
1. Select th e tr ansi tion s on which to i nser t co lore d fr ames:
o
To selec t a sing le tr ansi ti on, pos itio n the mo use c ursor ne xt to t he rel evan t
video tra nsit ion.
o
To selec t sever al tra nsit ions, ad d a mark IN an d mark OUT bey ond th e
releva nt trans iti ons.
2. Select th e
butto n.
This o pens the Aud io/V id eo Fx wind ow.
3. In th e Au dio/ Vide o Fx win dow, s elec t th e Co lor Ins ertio n ta b.
146
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
4. In th is t ab, sele ct:
o
the r eques ted col or
o
the n umber of fram es f or the c olor ins erti on
o
the t rans itio ns wh ere the insert ion shou ld be a ppli ed
5. Click OK.
147
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
8.3
VIDEO CLIP EFFECTS
8.3.1
INTRODUCTION
Up to four dif feren t video effects ca n simult aneo u sly be appl ied on the vi d eo clips
of an edit. Yo u can defi n e them via the Vid eo Cli p FX command in the co ntext ual
menu y ou a cces s whe n ri ght-cl icki ng a se lect ed v i deo e lemen t in th e tim eli ne:
Some o f vi deo effe cts ca n be appl ied to a gro up o f cli ps.
Other v ideo eff ects ( high light ed in the s elec tion li st with an as teri sk *) , ca n only
be plac ed on a sing le cl i p at a tim e, as they i nvol ve sett ing a time wi thi n a clip to
apply the eff ect (key fram e eff ects ).
From the con tex tual me n u, you can al so remo ve t he video e ffec ts usin g th e Reset
command .
8.3.2
HOW TO APPLY A VIDEO CLIP EFFECT
To appl y vide o cli p eff e cts to o ne or s ever al cli ps (for non ke y fram e e ffect s),
procee d as fol lows :
1. Select th e cl ips w here to apply the eff ects in one o f the fol lowi ng wa ys:
o
To defi ne an e ffec t on a single clip, pos itio n the mouse cu rsor n ext t o the
video tra nsit ion on wh ich you wa nt t o ad d t he e ffec t.
o
To defi ne an eff ect o n se veral c lips , ad d a mar k I N and mar k OUT p oin ts t o
cover the c lips to wh ich the effe cts sho uld be ap plied . The effe cts wil l be
appli ed from t he fi rst cl i p where th e mark IN p oi nt is def ined , up to a nd
includ ing the las t cl ip w h ere t he ma rk OU T is def i ned.
2. Right- clic k to acc ess the contex tua l men u.
148
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
3. In th e con text ual menu , select the Vid eo Cl ip FX comman d, t hen the num ber
on wh ich you want to de f ine t he effe ct, and fi nall y the eff ect typ e yo u wa nt to
defin e.
If sp ecif ic p arame ters ha ve to be defi ned for the e ffect , th e di alog box rel at ed
to th e se lect ed v ideo cli p effe ct i s di spla yed. Oth e rwise, the ef f ect is dire ctl y
appli ed t o th e cl ip.
4. Fill in t he r eque sted par a meters for the vid eo c lip effec t.
5. Click OK.
The effe ct is ap pli ed to t he video c lip el emen t, w hich tur ns to a da rker b l ue color
in th e ti meli ne d ispl ay:
One or more c lip ef fect s can be cop ied fr om a cli p to anoth er one as e xpl ained in
the s ecti on 8 .3.6 ‘Co pyin g and Past ing Vide o Cl ip Effec ts’, on page 155 .
Note
You can use th e keyb o ard shor tcut
to directl y access the Cl ip
Effec t wi ndow . By de fau lt, the Vide o E ffec t w ind ow of th e l ast crea ted
effec t op ens.
8.3.3
SIMPLE VIDEO CLIP EFFECTS
G REY , H ORIZONTAL M IRROR AND F ILM E FFECT
The fo llow ing vide o cl ip effec ts ar e ap plie d di rect ly to the sele cted cli ps o r to th e
clips bet ween mark IN a nd mar k OU T po int s as no ad diti onal se ttin gs ne ed to be
defin ed.
If you h ave d efin ed mar k s, a dia log b ox wil l be d i splaye d to a llow y ou to change
the c lips on w hich th e ef f ect s houl d be app lied :
149
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Video C lip Effe ct
Descri ption
Grey ( B&W)
This e ffec t r emove s th e c olor from a se lect ed e lem ent.
Horiz( onta l) Mi rror
This e ffec t f lips the ima g e to a ho rizo ntal mirr or o f the
origin al.
Film E ffec t
This e ffec t a dds a fi lm l ik e qua lity to movi ng p ictu r es.
C OLOR F ADE
This eff ect al lows th e ad ditio n of a fade u p at th e beginn ing of a cl ip and a fade
out a t th e en d o f a clip to a sel ecte d co lor. Wh en you se lect thi s ef fec t in t he
contex tua l men u, t he w in dow be low is d ispl ayed .
The Fa de from colo r parame ters all ow s peci f ying the col or f ade up at the
beginn ing of the clip .
The Fade to co lor pa ram eters a llow spec ifyi ng th e color f ade o ut a t the end of the
clip.
150
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
C OLOR C ORRECTION
This ef fect m akes it pos s ible to chan ge th e RGB p aramet ers to adju st th e c olor of
an image . When you se le ct this ef fect i n the con te xtual men u, the wi ndow b elow is
displa yed.
To adj ust t he co lor, you need t o sli de t he se lect o rs for the three col ors. Y ou can
also m odif y th e br ight nes s, co ntras t, blac k l e vel, a nd whi te l evel .
151
Issue 4.1.B
8.3.4
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
VIDEO CLIP EFFECTS WITH KEY FRAMES
I NTRODUCTION
These th ree opt ions o n the Video FX me nu only appear f or a sing le clip s elect io n
as th ey r equir e ke yfra me s to be a dded to the vide o elem ent sele cted .
A keyfr ame i s a d rawin g that d efi nes t he st arti n g and e ndin g poi nts of a vide o
effec t. T he addi tion of ke yframe s is a simi lar oper ation for al l t hree eff ects and i s
detai led afte r br iefl y de sc ribing th em.
H IGHLIGHT
This opti on all ows an ob ject with in the cl ip to b e tracked ov er a perio d of time
using a h ighl ight ed s hape .
P IXEL M ASK
This opt ion all ows an are a within th e clip to mas k ed using a pix elat ion ef f ect. The
area c an b e t racke d ov er the p erio d re quire d.
152
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
Z OOM L INEAR
This opt ion al lows an a rea with in the c lip to b e zoomed or e nl ar ged o ver th e
period req uire d wi thin a c lip.
8.3.5
ADDING KEY FRAMES FOR AN EFFECT
Each effe ct w indo w v ari es sl ight ly to offe r t he necess ary para mete rs, but the
princi pal of oper atio n an d basic la yout is the same for a ll.
To add an ef fect with key frames (Hig hlig ht, P ixel Mask, Z oom L inear ), p roc eed as
follow s:
1. Select th e cl ip o n wh ich y ou wan t to de fine eff ects .
2. Right- clic k to acces s th e contex tual me nu. The n select th e Video Cl ip FX
command , the numbe r o n which y ou wan t to d efi ne the e ffec t, an d fin ally an
effec t ty pe y ou w ant to d efine .
153
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
The re leva nt w indow is di splaye d. B y de faul t, the Design mode is act ive. T his
is th e mod e to be use d to defi ne t he e ffec t.
3. Define how the eff ect sho uld s tart on the firs t im ag e as foll ows:
a. Using the t rans port com mands, brow se to the fi rst ima ge o n whi ch t he
effec t sh ould be appl ied.
b. In the Too ls grou p box, select t he sha pe you wa nt to use fo r the are a of
the im age to be h ighl ight ed, p ixel ated or zoome d.
c. Draggi ng th e mou se, d ra w the sh ape o n th e imag e, wit h the requ este d siz e
and po sit ion.
d. Click the Add b utt on i n t he cen ter of the wind ow.
The da ta r ela ted to t he e f fect on t his time code is a dded to t he r ight par t of t he
window .
154
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
4. Define how the eff ect sho uld e nd o n th e la st i mage as f ollow s:
a. Browse to the last ima ge on whi ch t he e ffe ct s houl d be appl ied.
b. Adapt the pos itio n an d si ze of the sha pe o n th e im age t o yo ur n eeds .
c. Click the Add b utt on.
The da ta r ela ted to t he e f fect on t his time code is a dded to t he r ight par t of t he
window .
5. Specif y t he p arame ters r elate d to the ef fect :
a. For the h ighl ight e ffec t , you can c hang e the defaul t offs et (c ontr as t
betwee n hi ghli ghte d ar ea and surro undi ng a rea) .
b. For t he p ixel atio n e ffec t , you can cha nge the d efaul t si ze o f t he p ixel
blocks .
6. When t he ef fec t is defi n ed, yo u ca n sel ect the P review rad io b utto n, a nd use
the t rans port comma nds t o have a previ ew o f th e d efine d cl ip e ffec t.
7. Click OK t o sa ve t he e ffe ct.
8.3.6
COPYING AND PASTING VIDEO CLIP EFFECTS
I NTRODUCTION
The sam e vid eo cl ip e ffe ct (or set o f ef fect s) ca n be app lied to se vera l vid eo cli ps
in th e ti meli ne u sing the Copy a nd P aste fun ctio ns .
The fo llow ing prin cipl es a pply to t he C opy and P as te ac tion s:
•
The vi deo clip ef fect s th a t are cop ied are only tho s e tha t:
o
are av aila ble in the Vide o clip FX c onte xtua l me nu AND
o
do no t re quir e a keyf ram e eff ect.
The ot her eff ects such as Speed or Conv ersi on a re not copi ed e ithe r.
•
The Past e act ion res ets and remo ves al l exis ting effec ts alr eady a ppli ed to the
desti nati on c lips .
155
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
H OW TO C OPY A V IDEO E FFECT
To cop y a vide o ef fec t, p r oceed as foll ows:
1. Select th e cl ip wi th the al ready conf igur ed e ffec ts
2. Right- clic k to ope n th e co ntext ual m enu
3. Select Copy Cli p FX .
H OW TO P ASTE A V IDEO E FFECT
To pas te these cop ied vi deo e ffec ts, proc eed as f ollows :
1. Select t he cli p you want to apply the c opie d effe cts to or set a ma rk IN an d
mark OU T po ints to cove r the clip s to whi ch t he e ff ects s houl d b e pa sted .
2. Right- clic k to ope n th e co ntext ual m enu
3. Select Pas te C lip F X.
156
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
8.4
CONVERSION EFFECTS
8.4.1
INTRODUCTION
Issue 4.1.B
Each c lip can be conv ert ed by the so ftwar e i n Xe dio Cl eanE dit to matc h th e form a t
that t he tim elin e is u sing . Conve rsio n can b e from and to 4 :3 an d 16: 9 with Pan &
Scan a nd L ett erbox mod e s supp orte d.
When yo u ha ve c reat ed the Ed it, you have sel ec ted t he as pect rat io f or t he edi t
(or it was no n-ed itab le, as for 16: 9 with HD vi de o standa rds) . Depen ding on the
aspect ra tio for the edit , you ha ve s elec ted a d efa ult c onver sion ty pe.
You can chan ge the mod e used for the se lec ted c onvers ion typ e (for ex am ple PS,
inste ad of t he de faul t c onvers ion t ype wh ich w as LB), by add ing a c o nversi on
effec ts to a cli p or to se v eral c lips betwe en a m ar k IN and mark OUT. Y ou will no t
be ab le t o ch ange the c onvers ion type it self sin ce it is set at the begi n ning and
has t o rem ain unch ange d in t he w hole edi t.
8.4.2
CHANGING THE MODE FOR THE CONVERSION TYPE
To chan ge th e mode for the con vers ion t ype f or one or s evera l cli ps, p ro ceed as
follow s:
1. Select th e cl ips w here to apply the eff ects in one o f the fol lowi ng wa ys:
o
To def ine an effe ct o n on e cli p, c lick the req uest e d cli p
o
To defi ne an e ffec t on s everal clip s, add a mark IN and mar k OUT th at
covers the fi rst and the l ast c lip.
2. Right- clic k to acc ess the contex tua l men u.
3. Select Conv ersi on FX an d the req uire d ef fect .
The Cl ip E ffec t wi ndow o pens:
157
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
4. In th e Con fig . gr oup box, select th e mod e to be us ed fo r co nvers ion type
5. In PS mode , yo u ca n ad ditio nall y se lect a V erti c al Of fset in 16:9 and als o a
Horizo ntal Off set in 4 :3.
6. Click OK.
The mo de a nd o ffse t de fi ned wi ll b e ap pli ed t o th e selec ted cli ps.
158
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
9. Editing in Place
9.1
OVERVIEW
The Edit i n plac e feat ure allows th e user t o acce s s and edi t recor ded A/ V materi al
direct ly fr om a c amcor de r, a dri ve or a VTR l ike a Sony XD CAM, a Pana s onic P2
or a CANON Compa ct F lash ins ide Cle anEd it wi thout an y dela y or file t ransfe r
after c onnec tin g the de vi ce to his wo rkst atio n or lapto p. Thi s feat ure is a vailab le
throug h t he De vice s ta b of th e Cl eanEd it w ork are a.
The Devic es tab pr ovid es autom atic ally th e lis t of conne cted de vice s to the
workst atio n. Sel ecti ng o ne or sev eral d evic es sh ould di spla y thei r corr es pondin g
conten t ( clip s) i n a spe ci fic w orksp ace from whe r e the use r i s ab le to b ro wse an d
choose the des ired A/V m ateri al f or f urth er e diti ng.
The Devi ces t ab in terf a ce cons ists of two area s. They are hi ghl ight ed on the
follow ing scre ensh ot a nd shortl y de scri bed in the t able below :
Area
Descri ption
1. Sou rce Devi ce
This ar ea di spla ys th e pl ugged- in de vice s and the media that
has bee n aut omat ical ly detec ted on the d evic es , as wel l as
media from driv es an d f olders whi ch ha ve b een scann ed b y
the u sers .
See al so the sect ion 9.2 ‘ Source Dev ice A rea’ , on page 1 61.
159
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Area
Descri ption
2. Wor kspac e
This is the wo rkin g ar ea where yo u mainl y perfor m the
follow ing act ions :
• Search ing for the requ e sted c lips , po ten tial ly b y appl ying
search fi lters .
• Loadin g, p layi ng a nd e dit ing th e so urce clip s to cr eate s ubclips tha t wi ll b e ad ded t o a s tory board .
See al so the sect ion 9.3 ‘ Workspa ce A rea’ , on pag e 162 .
160
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
9.2
SOURCE DEVICE AREA
9.2.1
INTRODUCTION
When you open Xedi o CleanE dit, the a ppli c ation a utom atic ally det ects th e
plugge d-in SD o r HD dev ices ( P2, X DCAM o r XD CAM EX, CANON supp or ts), a nd
search es f or m edia pre se nt on the se s uppo rts.
USB dev ices and XF d r ives c an b e sc anne d, s o the ir co nten t is ava il able for
browsi ng, logg ing, rou gh- cut a nd e xpor t.
9.2.2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The So urce Devi ce a rea displa ys:
• the i dent ifi ed d evic es a s the r oot bra nches of
an expa ndab le tr ee v ie w and th e det ecte d
media b elow t he de vice o n which it is s tore d.
The pat h where the m edia is loca ted is
specif ied .
• the fol ders s cann ed by users an d the ir sub folde rs.
The chec k-box es are u se d to speci fy the m edia
to be dis play ed in th e T humbna il vie w and in
the Lis t view o f the Wo rkspac e. See a lso 9 .4
‘Selec ting Rel evan t Me di a’, o n pa ge 1 68.
161
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
9.3
WORKSPACE AREA
9.3.1
INTRODUCTION
In the Work spac e are a, y ou wil l lis t, a pply fil ters , browse and edit the medi a usin g
one o f th e fo ur p ossi ble v iews.
The user in terf ace ele me nts in the Wor kspa ce ar ea diffe r depen ding o n the view
mode.
9.3.2
VIEW MODES IN THE WORKSPACE
You can se lect t he requ ested vi ew by cli ckin g one of the v iew but tons at th e
bottom of the Work space area:
162
View
Descri ption
Thumbna il v iew
The Th umbna il view shows the thu mbna ils
corres pond ing to t he va rious sour ce cl ips of t h e
media sele cted in the So urce D evic e ar ea.
List v iew
The List vi ew disp lays t h e list of so urce cl ips fro m
the media s elec ted in th e Source Dev ice are a an d
gives a cces s to t he di ffe rent f ilte rs whi ch ca n be
appli ed t o re stri ct t he l ist of c lips dis play ed.
Clip P laye r vi ew
The Cl ip P laye r vi ew al lo ws pla ying sou rce clip s.
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
9.3.3
Issue 4.1.B
THUMBNAIL VIEW IN THE WORKSPACE AREA
P URPOSE
You wi ll w ork in t his view to s elec t th e ca meras so urce c lips you wan t to edi t.
O VERVIEW
The Thu mbna il v iew s ho ws the thum bnai ls co rre spondi ng t o th e var ious sourc e
clips of the medi a se lect e d in the Sour ce De vice ar ea:
For ea ch c lip, th e fo llow i ng met adat a is dis play ed:
•
the c lip name (abo ve t he thumbn ail)
•
the TC IN, TC OUT , an d durat ion of t he c lip in t he sou rce m edia (be low the
thumbn ail)
Double -cli ckin g a thumb n ail o pens the cor respo ndi ng cl ip i n th e Cl ip P laye r view.
S ELECTING T ECHNIQUES
Severa l sou rce cl ips c an be sele cted to mov e the m at onc e to a p roje ct (a mongst
the me dia or t he c lips or in an exi stin g ed it) . Yo u can sele ct t hem than ks to t he
usual comma nds:
•
Press C TRL + clic k on the it ems f or a sele ctio n of mu ltip le n on-co nti g uous
items.
•
Press SHI FT + clic k on the first a nd las t item for a selec tion o f mult iple
conti guous it ems.
163
Issue 4.1.B
9.3.4
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
LIST VIEW IN THE WORKSPACE AREA
P URPOSE
You will pref erab ly use t his view to see the cl ip s metada ta whe n you w ork with
drives / fold ers in t he D e vice a rea.
O VERVIEW
The L ist view dis play s t h e lis t o f al l c lips pre sent in th e s elec ted medi a, a n d the ir
associ ated met adat a. D iff erent fil ers can be a ppli e d to rest rict the lis t.
The fol lowin g tabl e prov i des a shor t desc ript ion o f the var ious a reas hi ghl i ghted i n
the L ist view .
You will fi nd more in form ation on th e List vi ew in the sect ion 9.4 .3 ‘Se arch ing fo r
Clips with in t he L ist View ’, on pag e 17 0:
164
User I nter face
Element
Descri ption
See al so …
1. Sea rch Tools
Provid es a Quick Te xt Search fi eld and
Advance d Fil ters fie lds to res tric t th e lis t to
specif ic data .
Sectio ns
4.3.2 and
4.3.3
2. Sav ed F ilte rs
Tabs
Allows to s ave filt ers a nd to appl y the m la ter
on.
Sectio n 4 .3.4
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
User I nter face
Element
Descri ption
See al so …
3. El ement Lis t
Displa ys th e li st of cli ps corres pond ing to th e
select ed sou rce in t he D evice ar ea, or r etur ns
the r esul t of a s earc h ap plied to the list .
Next 2
sectio ns
D ISPLAYED C OLUMNS
It is pos sibl e to re-a rr ange the c olum ns orde r , and to ad d or remov e some
column s.
Right- clic king on an y o f the col umn hea ding s d i splays a con text ual men u. Th e
Choose Di spla yed Colu mns opti on ope ns the Select V isib le Col umns window
allowi ng y ou t o ch oose th e col umns you w ant to be disp layed in the ele ment list .
The col umn wi dth a nd or der can be ad just ed us in g stand ard c ompu ter co mmand s
and dr ag a nd drop tech ni ques.
E LEMENT L IST C ONTEXTUAL M ENU
A cont extu al m enu is a va ilabl e whe n yo u ri ght- clic k on an i tem in t he l ist:
Menu It em
Descri ption
Play
Loads the c lip in t he Cl i p Play er wi ndow to al low the c lip
to be brow sed.
Render List
Opens th e Render L is t window li stin g all t ypes of
render ing tha t ha ve b een done with th e cl ip.
Archiv e His tory
Opens the Arc hive His tor y win dow list ing the arc h ive a nd
restor e proc esses t hat were achi eved f or the select ed
clip.
View P roper ties
Opens t he Me dia Pr op erties wind ow whi ch sh ows the
proper ties for th e sel ec ted cli p. If a defa ult m etada ta
profi le has been de fin ed for the medi a, a metad at a tab is
displa yed and all ows t o modify the cli p me tada ta values .
165
Issue 4.1.B
9.3.5
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
CLIP PLAYER VIEW IN THE WORKSPACE AREA
P URPOSE
You wi ll w ork in t his view to p erfo rm th e f ollow ing actio ns:
•
Playin g t he so urce cli ps displa yed in the thumb nai l view .
•
Prepar ing sub- clip s to be added to a p roje ct.
O VERVIEW
The Cl ip P laye r is acc ess ible via the Clip Pla yer b utton
.
The Cl ip P laye r vi ew ma i nly co nsis ts of a medi a p l ayer a nd a ssoc iate d co m mands:
The var ious eleme nts o f the Cli p Pla yer u ser i nt erface from the D evice s tab are
simila r t o th ose pres ent i n the Pla yer area of the Edit tab. So , re fer to sec tion 6.2
‘Playe r Ar ea’ on p age 57 for d etai led info rmat ion.
The fol lowin g tabl e prov i des a shor t desc ript ion o f the var ious a reas hi ghl i ghted i n
the Cl ip P laye r vi ew.
166
User I nter face
Element
Descri ption
1. Vid eo D ispl ay
& Audio Mete rs
It disp lays the med ia l oaded o n the Pl ayer . Parame ters
relat ed t o th e di spla y ar e avai labl e vi a a cont extu a l menu .
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
User I nter face
Element
Issue 4.1.B
Descri ption
The audi o mete rs show t he leve ls of th e vari ous audio t racks
of th e cl ip t hat is bein g pl ayed.
2. Tra ck
Select ion
buttons
The Trac k Sele cti on b utton s (lit tle c amera a nd tria ngle
butto ns) al low yo u to s elect t he vi deo an d aud io chan nels
you wa nt t o i nclud e i n th e cli p/su b-cl ip.
The radi o butt ons di spla yed next t o audi o chan nel but tons
allow you to s elec t wh ic h aud io t rack you want to mon itor
when y ou p lay the load ed clip in the Clip Pla yer.
3. Jog and
Media bar
The jo g bar all ows y ou t o move w ithi n th e med ia a t a va riab le
speed.
The Medi a bar r epre sen ts the c lip c urren tly l oa ded on t he
Player :
• If the s ourc e cli p is l oaded o n the P laye r f rom the
thumbn ail view , t he IN a nd OUT po ints in itia lly d isplay ed
are t he o nes of t he s ourc e cli p.
4. Edi ting and
Transpo rt
commands /fi elds
The edi ting and tran spor t butto ns mai nly allow you to per form
the f ollow ing act ions :
• Browse in and play the s ource clip lo aded on the player .
• Mark t he I N an d OUT poi nts o f th e cl ip.
• Naviga te betwe en the lo gs cr eate d o n t he c lip l oaded in
the p laye r.
5. Vi ew Mod e
buttons
These but tons al low yo u to change th e View mode in the
Workspa ce.
6. Nex t/Pr eviou s
Clip b utton s
These butt ons allo w yo u to mov e to the nex t o r pr evious cli p
availa ble in the Thumb na il vi ew.
167
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
9.4
SELECTING RELEVANT MEDIA
9.4.1
DISPLAYING FOLDER CONTENT IN THE SOURCE DEVICE
AREA
XF driv es or US B dev ice s conta inin g medi a bac k ed up fr om EVS v ideo se rvers o n
an eve nt loca tion can be used in Xe dio Clea nEdi t Device s ta b.
H OW TO A DD AND S CAN A F OLDER
To dis play a fold er co nte nt, p roce ed a s fo llows :
1. In th e So urce Devi ce a re a, ri ght- clic k th e Fo lders line.
A cont extu al m enu appe a rs.
2. Select Add & Sc an Fo ld er.
A wind ow op ens.
3. Type a dev ice name .
4. Browse for the dev ice fol der t o sc an.
5. Click OK.
The fold er is add ed to th e Source De vice ar ea an d its cont ent is sc anne d and ca n
be di splay ed in t he Wo rk space area .
F OLDER D ISPLAY P ROPERTIES
To change t he root f ol der disp lay, ri ght- clic k the Folder s area in th e Source
Device are a. A con text ua l menu giv es y ou s ever al displa y op tio ns:
Menu Op tion
Descri ption
Device Labe l
This c orre spon ds t o t he d evice name giv en duri ng the A dd
& Scan Fol der oper atio n.
Folder Name
This c orre spon ds t o th e n ame of the fo lder /vol ume.
Full P ath
This c orre spon ds t o th e fold er f ull path (f older and its
subfo lders )
Folder – P ath
This d ispl ays the fol der n ame fo llow ed b y th e fo lde r pat h.
M ANAGING THE F OLDERS
A right -cli ck on a fold er opens a m enu pr ovid ing optio ns to a dd a sc an fo lder, t o
rescan th e selec ted fo ld er, to chan ge the pro per ties of the se lect ed fol d er or to
delet e th e se lect ed f olde r .
168
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
9.4.2
Issue 4.1.B
LISTING CLIPS IN THE WORKSPACE AREA
You wi ll c reat e t he s tory board cli ps o n th e ba sis of s ourc e cl ips incl uded in t h e
availa ble medi a.
In th e Wo rksp ace area , t wo vi ews are avai labl e t o dis play th e co nten t o f select e d
device s or fo lders .
•
the Th umbn ail view
•
the L ist view
D ISPLAYING THE S OURCE C LIPS IN THE T HUMBNAIL V IEW
Tickin g th e ch eck box c orresp ondi ng t o a m edia in t he So urce Devi ce a rea an d
clicki ng the
button to s elect th e Thumbn ail vie w will displ ay thumb nail s f or
each s ourc e cl ip i nclu ded in t his medi a on the Wor kspace are a.
169
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
L ISTING THE S OURCE C LIPS IN THE L IST V IEW
Tickin g th e ch eck box cor respon ding to a me dia in the So urce Dev ice area a nd
clicki ng the
but ton to s el ect t he L ist view will di sp lay t he l ist of s ourc e cl ip s
includ ed in t his m edia an d the ir a ssoc iate d met ad ata o n th e Wor kspa ce a re a.
9.4.3
SEARCHING FOR CLIPS WITHIN THE LIST VIEW
The Lis t view of th e Devi ces tab is sim ilar to the t abs use d for s earc hing fo r media
(Media M anag er, E dit Ma nager a nd Pro jec t Mana g er tabs ); So , you w ill f in d more
inform atio n and t he se ar ch tool s in se ctio n 4 ‘Se archin g for a nd Man agin g Media’
on pag e 2 4.
170
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
9.5
LOADING A SOURCE CLIP ON THE CLIP
PLAYER
9.5.1
PURPOSE
A clip can be loa ded on t he Cli p Pl ayer in dif feren t w ays .
9.5.2
HOW TO LOAD A CLIP IN THE CLIP PLAYER
•
To loa d a s ourc e cl ip f ro m the T humb nail view , d ouble- clic k on it and the clip
will d ispl ay in t he Cl ip P l ayer.
The cl ip b ound arie s di spl ayed a re the ones of the source cli p.
•
To load a so urce cl ip fr om the Lis t view, d oubl e -click o n it and t he cli p will
displa y i n th e Cl ip P layer .
When you loa d a clip in the Clip Playe r, the Cli p Player bec omes aut om atica lly
active , a nd t he C lip P lay er bu tton is sele cted
9.6
ADDING LOGS TO A CLIP
9.6.1
INTRODUCTION
.
Wheneve r yo u wa nt, you can ad d l ogs to t he m ater ial l oade d in the Cli p Pl a yer .
9.6.2
HOW TO ADD A LOG TO A CLIP
The fo llow ing p roce dure explai ns t he d iffe rent wa ys to add logs and to a s sociat e
metada ta t o t hem.
Preliminary Steps
You f irst nee d to loa d a c lip a nd p osit ion the nowl i ne at the spe cifi c ti meco de:
1. Load the so urce cl ip in t he Clip Play er. For mor e inform atio n, see th e secti ons
9.5.2 .
2. Positi on th e nowl ine o n t he fram e where you wa n t to add a log i n one o f the
follow ing ways :
o
Using the tran spor t bu tto ns
o
Draggi ng t he n owli ne t o t he req uest ed frame
o
Typing the req uest ed T C in th e now line TC fiel d an d pres sing ENTE R.
171
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Add a Log
If you wan t to add a lo g, which is a log with no a ssocia ted meta data , sim ply cl ick
the Ad d Log but ton
.
A whit e tr iang le is d ispl a yed on th e med ia b ar a t t he lo g tim ecod e.
9.6.3
LOG DISPLAY
The log cr eate d is adde d to the med ia bar , but the log is d ispl ayed i n d iffer ent
ways i n th e us er i nter fac e.
L OG C OLOR AND R ANKING
The lo g wi ll h ave a di ffe r ent c olor dep endi ng o n th e rank ing assi gned :
•
White log for no-s tar rank ing ( defa ult)
•
Blue log for 1-st ar ra nkin g
•
Green log for 2-st ar r anki ng
•
Red lo g fo r 3- star ran kin g
K EYWORDS A SSOCIATED TO A L OG
Player Area
Once th e nowl ine i s pos it ioned o n a lo g time code , the key words asso ciat ed to this
log are li sted be low the v ideo dis play an d are dis p layed as a to ol tip wh en you roll
the mo use over the log :
172
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
9.6.4
OTHER POSSIBLE ACTIONS ON LOGS
The fo llow ing tabl e de scr ibes s hort ly othe r pos sib l e act ions on logs :
Action
Descri ption
Moving from one log to the
other
• Click th e Go to Prev . Lo g button
to move to
the l og p osit ione d on the left of t he n owli ne.
• Click the Go to Ne xt Lo g button
to move to
the l og p osit ione d on the right of the nowl ine.
Deleti ng a log
When the now line i s posi tione d on a log (us ing th e
, but tons ) y ou c an del ete i t ( and all it s
metada ta) in t he foll owin g ways
• Clicki ng CT RL+
Displa ying only log s ha ving
a give n ra nking
.in t he P l ayer a rea.
By def ault , al l lo gs a re displ ayed in the load e d
materi al.
If you wan t to dis play only the logs hav ing a
specif ic ran king , righ t-cl i ck on the l og, ri ght ab ov e
the me dia bars .
The foll owin g cont extu al menu is di spla yed.
Select t he chec k boxes ( extern al) th at corr espon d
to th e ra nkin g(s) you wan t to disp lay.
Do the rev erse ope rati on to re disp lay all logs .
173
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
10. Advanced Audio
Editing
10.1 OVERALL AUDIO TRACK SETTINGS
The tab le b elow g ives an over view of th e mai n step s inv olve d in t he audio
managem ent in C lean Edit .
Step
Set the
creati on
Covered in Sect ion…
edi t
audi o
type
at
ed it
Set the audi o type of each time line
track
5.4.4 ‘Creating an Edit Genera l Ta b’ o n pa ge 4 7.
6.5.9 ‘Aud io Tr ack Select ion
Setti ngs in t he T imeli ne -
and
Track N ame a nd A udi o Type in the
Timeli ne’ on p age 93.
Select tim elin e aud io t r acks
6.5.9 ‘Aud io Tr ack Select ion and
Setti ngs in the T imeli ne - Audio T rack
Select ion fo r Editi ng Ac tions ’ on page
93.
Set the output tr ack for each timeli ne
track
6.5.9 ‘Aud io Tr ack Select ion
Setti ngs in t he T imeli ne -
and
Audio Tr ack Se lect ion fo r the Outp ut’ on
page 9 3.
174
In the Pl ayer a rea, s el ect the au dio
channe ls/t racks to be loaded in the
timeli ne
6.2.8 ‘S elec ting th e Trac ks to be Added
to th e Tim elin e - Trac k Sele ctio n f or
Clips and Moni tori ng’ on page 6 8.
In the Record er area , select
output trac k to be m onit ored
6.3.6 ‘ Sele ctin g the M onito red Au dio
Tracks ’ on pag e 80 .
th e
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
10.2 AUDIO TRANSITION EFFECTS
10.2.1 WAYS TO ADD AUDIO TRANSITION EFFECTS
You ca n ad d au dio tran sit ion e ffec ts u sing dif fere nt metho ds:
•
Adding the de faul t aud io transi tio n effe ct to a ll ne w audio c lips p lace d int o the
timeli ne.
See t he s ecti on 1 0.2. 2 ‘ A dding Aut omati call y De fa ult A udio Tra nsit ion Effe c ts’,
on pag e 1 75.
•
Adding a tra nsit ion e ffe ct on on e or mo re co nt iguous audi o elem ents of a
track.
See the s ecti on 10 .2.5 ‘ Adding Audi o Trans iti on Effect s on El ement s of the
Same Tr ack’ , on pa ge 1 7 7.
•
Adding a trans iti on e ffec t on o ne o r mor e au dio el ements of the same cli p.
See the s ecti on 10 .2.6 ‘ Adding Audi o Trans iti on Effect s on El ement s of the
Same Cl ip’ , on pag e 17 9.
If yo u a dd an effe ct on a tra nsit ion wher e a n a u dio t rans itio n e ffec t h as alread y
been d efi ned, the ini tia l e ffect wil l be rep lace d by t he new one .
10.2.2 ADDING AUTOMATICALLY DEFAULT AUDIO TRANSITION
EFFECTS
Once yo u cli ck th e
button to acti vate the AF X funct ion, a def ault aud io
transi tio n is add ed t o ea ch new cli p pl aced int o the e dit. The cros s fa de is t he
defau lt a udio tra nsit ion in itial ly d efin ed i n Xe dio.
10.2.3 MODIFYING THE AUTOMATIC DEFAULT TRANSITION EFFECT
The d efau lt tran siti on e ff ect i s d efin ed in X edio Manage r: S oftw are > P a ramete r
Profil es > (Xe dio) Clea nE dit > Time line ta b: De faul tAudio Tran sFx.
However , yo u ca n mo dify the defa ult audi o tr ansi ti on ef fec t as foll ows:
1. Right- clic k th e bu tton an d sel ect Prope rtie s.
The Au dio Tran siti on E ffe ct win dow is d ispl ayed .
2. Specif y t he re ques ted def ault tran siti on e ffec t
3. Click OK.
The new tra nsit ion effe ct is now the def ault tra ns ition asso ciat ed w ith y ou r user
profi le.
175
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
10.2.4 POSSIBLE AUDIO TRANSITION EFFECTS
When y ou s elec t th e au di o tra nsit ion effe ct y ou w a nt to app ly, you have th e choi ce
amongs t fou r typ es of au dio tr ansi tion s eff ects . T hey are desc ribe d and ill ustra ted
below by a zoo med disp l ay of the aud io t rans itio n effe ct:
Cut
No trans itio n eff ect is perfor med. T he aud io of the
second clip r epla ces t he soun d of th e fir st clip
insta ntly . No blue line ( which r efl ects a tr ansi tio n) is
shown at t he join t whe n a cut is p rese nt.
This i s rep rese nted by t he
Transi tion Eff ect wind ow.
icon in the Audi o
Fade ou t
The soun d of th e firs t clip fa des ou t prog ress i vely
while t he a udio of th e se cond c lip s tart s ins tant ly from
the t rans itio n po int.
This is re pres ente d by t he
Transi tion Eff ect wind ow.
icon in the Aud io
Fade i n
The soun d of th e fir st cli p disap pears inst antl y at the
transi tio n poin t whil e th e audio o f the se cond clip
starts pro gres sive ly.
This is r epre sent ed by th e
Transi tion Eff ect wind ow.
icon in the Aud io
Cross fade
The soun d of th e fir st cl ip fade s out wh ile t he s ound
of th e se cond cli p fa des i n.
This is re pres ente d by t he
Transi tion Eff ect wind ow.
176
icon in the Aud io
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
10.2.5 ADDING AUDIO TRANSITION EFFECTS ON ELEMENTS OF THE
SAME TRACK
I NTRODUCTION
You wa nt t o ad d au dio tr ansit ion effe cts to:
•
a sel ecte d el ement OR
•
conti guous el ement s
on a give n au dio trac k.
In this ca se, yo u will u se the (Lef t/Ri ght) Aud io Trans ition c ommand s in the
contex tua l men u av aila bl e on audi o el ement s in th e time line .
For mo re i nform ati on o n t he var ious ty pes of trans i tion effe cts , re fer to t he sectio n
10.2. 4 ‘P ossib le A udio Tr ansit ion Effe cts’ , on pag e 176.
The foll owin g audi o tra nsiti on eff ects a re avai l able: Cu t, Fad e OUT, F ade IN,
Cross F ade .
H OW TO A PPLY A UDIO T RANSITION E FFECTS O N E LEMENTS
ON THE S AME T RACK
To app ly a udio tran siti on effec ts t o on e el ement or con tigu ous audi o ele ments of
the s ame t rack , pr ocee d as fo llows :
1. If you want to d efin e a tr ansit ion eff ect on se vera l contigu ous tra nsit ions , s et a
mark IN a nd mark OUT p oints to cov er the cli ps o n whi ch the eff ects sh oul d be
appli ed.
Otherw ise, the tra nsit ion effec t wi ll b e de fine d on t he nea rest tr ansi tion to t he
posit ion of t he m ouse cur sor.
2. Right- clic k the mo use o n the tra ck whe re you want to d efin e the t rans ition
effec t ei ther :
o
near the clip tra nsit ion O R
o
betwee n th e de fine mar k IN and mar k OUT
The co ntex tual men u is d isplay ed:
177
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
3. Select the requ este d ef fect t ype i n th e (Le ft / Right ) Audi o Tran sit ion
command .
The Au dio Tran siti on E ffe ct win dow open s. I n th is window , yo u ca n st ill sele ct
anothe r e ffec t. T he d efin i tion of t he t rans itio ns w h ere t he e ffec t wi ll b e
appli ed, in t he A rea grou p box , ca nnot be m odi fie d.
4. In th e Aud io Tr ansi tio n Effec t wi ndow, fil l in t he tra nsit ion param eter s to
specif y t he d urat ion and posit ion of t he t rans itio n effec t.
5. Click OK.
A blue ver tica l l ine is a dd ed on the tra nsit ion wher e the eff ect has been add ed:
Once yo u have assi gned the bas ic typ e of a udio transi tion , you can zo o m and
adjus t the au dio tr ansi ti on on the t imeli ne, b y cl icking the Zoom b utt on
on
the ri ght hand side of t he req uire d tra ck. T he t rack wi ll t hen e xpan d v ertica lly
across all of the aud io t r acks t o sh ow t he t rans itio n.
Note
You can a lso us e the sh ortcu t key
Audio Tran siti on E ffec t w indow.
178
+
to direc tly call th e
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
10.2.6 ADDING AUDIO TRANSITION EFFECTS ON ELEMENTS OF THE
SAME CLIP
I NTRODUCTION
You can add an au dio tra nsiti on ef fect on o ne or more au dio e leme nts o f t he same
clip.
In this cas e, you wil l use the Audi o/Vi deo FX window , access ed via th e
butto n.
For mo re i nform ati on o n t he var ious ty pes of trans i tion effe cts, re fer to t he sectio n
10.2. 4 ‘P ossib le A udio Tr ansit ion Effe cts’ , on pag e 176.
The fol lowi ng aud io tr an sitio n eff ects a re av aila ble: Cu t, Cro ss Fa de, F ade IN,
Fade OU T.
H OW TO A PPLY A UDIO T RANSITION E FFECTS O N A UDIO
E LEMENTS OF THE S AME C LIP
To app ly an aud io tr ans ition on o ne or more au dio el emen ts of the sam e clip ,
procee d as fol lows :
1. Positi on th e nowl ine o n the cli p for w hich y ou want to a djus t the a u dio
transi tio ns.
2. Click th e Audi o/Vid eo F X butto n
and se lec t th e Au dio Fad e tab .
to ope n the A udio/V ideo F X wind ow
179
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
3. In th e up per grou p bo x, s pecify th e fo llow ing:
a. Tick t he type of tran siti on you w ant to appl y
b. Type t he n umbe r of fram es th e tr ansi tion eff ect sh ould last
c. Select th e lo cati on o f th e tran siti on a roun d th e cl i p joi nt.
4.
For a cros s fade , selec t whethe r you want t o appl y the effe ct at the b egin n ing
of th e c lip (pre viou s cu t ), or at the end of the clip (nex t cu t) on w hich the
nowlin e is pos itio ned.
5. Select th e tr acks on w hic h you want to app ly t he t r ansit ion effe ct.
6. Click Proce ed.
10.2.7 ADJUSTING AUDIO TRANSITIONS
To adj ust manu ally aud io tran siti ons on a spe cifi c track, pro ceed as fol lows :
1. Click t he Zoom butt on
located on th e rig ht ha nd side of the a udio track
on whi ch y ou w ant to a dj ust t rans itio ns.
2. In Zoo m mod e, iden tify th e tra nsit ion to m odif y.
3. Click t he wh ite node s th at cor respo nd t o the aud io tra nsit ion e ffe ct an d move
them t o gr aphi call y di spl ay th e re quire d t rans itio n .
10.2.8 REMOVING AUDIO TRANSITIONS
You c an also rem ove the prev ious ly defi ned tra nsi tion eff ects by rig ht-c lick ing th e
track on w hich you wan t to remov e t he t rans iti on ef fect s an d se lect ing Audio
Transi tions > C lear All i n the con text ual m enu .
180
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
10.3 AUDIO ROUTING, SWAPS AND MUTES
10.3.1 DEFAULT AND SPECIFIC AUDIO ROUTING
You ca n de fine def aul t a udio r out ing, as w ell as swaps and m utes on the audi o
channe ls of a ste reo tra c k via the Audi o Routing butto n
. This is exp lain ed in
the sec tion ‘Aud io Ro utin g For St ereo T rack s’, o n page 99 . The se op tion s will be
valid for eac h new cli p ad ded t o th e ed it.
You can also de fin e spec ific aud io rout ing, sw aps and mutes on an au dio e lement
of a ster eo trac k. T hese funct ions are ava ilab le a s you rig ht-c lick on the s elect ed
elemen t an d ch oose Audi o Chann els from the con textu al me nu.
10.3.2 POSSIBLE AUDIO CHANNEL FUNCTIONS
The funct ions av aila ble via the Audio Ch annel s command are div ided i nto four
groups of sub- comma nd s. A blac k bu llet is dis p layed in fron t of th e co mmands
appli ed t o th e se lect ed e l ements :
Group o f Sub -Comma nd s
Descri ption
These comma nds allow specif ying the sou rce tr ack
you wa nt t o be app lie d to the sele cted elem ent .
181
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Group o f Sub -Comma nd s
Descri ption
These comma nds all ow t he us er t o s peci fy w het her
the tra ck sho uld b e outp ut as a mon o or as a ste reo
track.
These comma nds allow t he use r:
• to rou te th e le ft or rig ht aud io ch anne l to bot h
stereo cha nnel s
• to mix both ste reo c han nels i nto one a udio mon o
channe l
These comma nds allow t he use r:
• to mut e t he l eft or r ight a udio chann el
• to swa p th e l eft and righ t audi o ch anne ls
• to swap th e lef t and ri gh t chann els an d mute o ne
of th em.
Note
Select ing St ereo f rom th e Audio Chan nels c omm and will r eset the au dio
channe l e ffec ts.
10.3.3 COPYING AND PASTING AUDIO ROUTING ACTIONS
The au dio eff ects def ine d on one elem ent usin g the Audio Chan nels c ommand
can b e c opie d a nd past ed to se vera l a udio el e ments and aud io trac ks in the
timeli ne, via the Copy an d Past e f unct ions :
The fo llow ing prin cipl es a pply to t he C opy and P as te ac tion s:
182
•
The audio e ffec ts that are copie d are only t ho se that are av aila ble in the
Audio Ch annel s com man d of t he co ntex tua l menu . The so urce sele cti on is not
copied .
•
The Past e act ion res ets and remo ves al l exis ting effec ts alr eady a ppli ed to the
desti nati on c lips .
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
To copy and p aste an a u dio ef fect , pro ceed the s ame way as fo r the vide o effec ts.
For a det aile d proc edur e , refer to the sect ion 8. 3.6 ‘Co pyin g and Pa stin g Video
Clip E ffec ts’, on pag e 15 5.
10.4 AUDIO LEVEL ADJUSTMENTS
10.4.1 INTRODUCTION
In Zoom mo de the leve l of the au dio cl ips i n t he edit a re al so dis play ed. The
horizo ntal line o n the ex panded a udio c lip r epres ents it s audi o leve l. The origin a l
audio lev el o f th e so urce clip is r efer red to a s th e 0db l evel :
10.4.2 HOW TO ADJUST THE AUDIO LEVEL ON A SINGLE CLIP
To adj ust the aud io l evel on a sing le c lip, pro ceed as fo llows :
1. In Zoom m ode, posi tion the mou se on the ho rizo ntal l ine (a udio leve l) of th e
clip to b e ad just ed.
2. When the mou se poin ter shows a doub le hea ded arrow, cl ick and h old on the
left butt on o f t he mo use.
3. Move th e aud io le vel line up or d own to resp ecti v ely in creas e or d ecre ase the
audio lev el o f th e cl ip:
The db inc reas e com pare d to the orig inal aud io l ev el is spe cifi ed o n th e au d io
level lin e as you move it .
4. Releas e th e mo use w hen you ha ve r each ed t he r eq uested aud io leve l.
183
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
10.4.3 HOW TO ADJUST THE OVERALL LEVEL OF A TRACK
To adj ust the aud io l evel of a w hole tr ack, proc eed as f ollow s:
1. Click on t he A udio/ Vide o FX bu tton
.
The Vi deo/ Audi o FX wind ow ope ns w ith the focu s on th e Au dio Leve l ta b:
2. Tick the Sou rce Chann el check box es corr esp onding t o the trac ks wh ose
audio lev el y ou wa nt to a djust .
3. In the Leve l Adju st b ox corres pond ing t o ea ch tr ack, s elec t how m any d b s you
want t o ad d t o or remo ve from a udio lev el o f t he t r ack.
4. Select th e ad justm ent mo de as fol lows:
a. If you want to ap ply the specif ied db va lue to the current aud io leve l, tic k
the Re lati ve r adio bu tton .
b. If you want to app ly the s pecif ied db valu e to the o rigina l audio l evel (0d b),
tick the A bsol ute r adio b utton .
5. Click OK.
The au dio leve l of the w hole t rack is a djus ted ac cordin g to the def ined va lue an d
adjus tment mod e.
184
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
10.5 MISCELLANEOUS AUDIO FEATURES
10.5.1 HOW TO GENERATE THE WAVEFORM OF AN AUDIO ELEMENT
You ca n ge nera te t he w a veform for aud io e leme nt (s) of an aud io t rack as f ollows :
To gen erat e th e wa vefo r m of a st ereo elem ent:
1. Right- clic k on the ele men t for whic h yo u wa nt t o g enerat e t he wa vefo rm,
2. Select Get aud io wa vefo rm fro m th e co ntex tual m enu:
To gen erat e th e wa vefo r m of a 5. 1 el ement :
1. Right- clic k on the ele men t for whic h yo u wa nt t o g enerat e t he wa vefo rm,
2. Select G et aud io wave f orm from t he con text ual menu and t he cha nnel s for
which you want to get the wavef orm:
The fol lowi ng mes sage will di spla y whil e the applic atio n is g ener at ing the
wavefo rm:
185
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Once the w avef orm has b een g enera ted , cl ick the Zoom Tr ack butt on
it:
to vi ew
10.5.2 HOW TO REMOVE AN AUDIO WAVEFORM
To rem ove the audi o wa veform on an a udio ele ment, righ t-cl ick on this elemen t
and se lec t Remo ve a udi o wave form from the con textu al me nu:
10.5.3 HOW TO DUPLICATE AN AUDIO TRACK
You can copy an d paste a full audi o track to an ot her track . If the des tina ti on track
is no t emp ty, its con tent will b e re plac ed b y th e co pied track .
To dup lica te a n a udio tra ck, pr ocee d as fo llows :
1. Right- clic k on a n aud io track a nd se lect D upli c ate Tra ck in the c onte x tual
menu.
The Dup lica te A udio Tra ck win dow opens .
186
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
Only th e tra cks wi th th e same aud io ty pe as the copied trac k are d ispl aye d in
the Se lec t Tar get Trac k fi eld g roup .
2. In the Sel ect Ta rget Tr ack fie ld grou p, tic k the track to wh ich you w an t to
duplic ate the cop ied trac k.
3. In th e App ly D efaul t Aud io Chan nel fie ld g roup , d o one of the foll owin g:
o
If you want to ap ply the default Au dio Chan nel setti ngs (th at is ster eo),
select ‘Ye s’
o
If y ou w ant to app ly the Audio Cha nnel set tin gs o f th e co pied tr ack, se lect
‘No’.
The au dio trac k is cop ied to t he d esti nati on track .
187
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
11. Voiceover, Graphics
and Text Graphics
11.1 ADDING VOICEOVER
11.1.1 VOICEOVER TAB OVERVIEW
The Vo iceo ver tab allow s the user to r ecor d a com mentar y on one or s ever al par ts
of the edi t. It i s made up of four mai n area s, highl igh ted on th e f ollowi ng
screen shot and sho rtly d escrib ed i n t he t able bel o w.
188
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Area Nu mber
Area Na me
1.
Text E dito r
2.
Audiom eter s
3.
Record er Wi ndow
4.
Graphi cal Timel ine
Issue 4.1.B
T EXT A REA
The text ar ea allo ws the additio n of the voi ceov e r script on th e disp lay. A script
can be t yped or ad ded u s ing Cop y & Pas te fr om an other a ppl icat ion. It ca n also be
retrie ved from a MOS st ory t hrou gh E VS A ctiv e X comp onen t o r fr om t h e Xed io
Cutter app lica tion .
A UDIO M ETER
The audi o meter pr ovid es an indica tion of t he inpu t audio le vel for t he micr ophone
when r ecor ding a v oice o ver. U nder neat h th e me t er is a Cf g bu tton tha t displa ys
the a udio lev el c onfi gura t ion t o ad just the set tin gs.
The volum e contr ol on th e left dete rmine s the ove rall aud io leve l. The micr ophone
level de fine s the leve l of the micro phon e input . The audio car d fitt ed to the
workst atio n bein g used may offer mo re cho ic es in con figur ing t he r ecordi ng
parame ters , pl ease con s ult t he u ser m anua l f or t h e dev ice used for more d etail s.
Note
The Dig igram boar d co nt rols t he co nfig urat ion fo r the a udio inpu ts a nd
outpu ts of the wo rkst atio n. It i s the refo re re comm ended to con fig ure t he
Digigr am boar d as shown on the screen shot s you will fin d in Appen dix 3:
Digigr am Ha rdwar e Se ttin gs.
189
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
R ECORDER A REA
This disp lay ar ea is si milar to th e norma l pa nel on the Ed it tab in that the
transp ort c ontr ols ar e th e same, b ut ha s some diffe rent feat ures t o rec ord the
voiceo ver.
The de scri ptio n of the c ommon t rans port but tons and f iel ds ca n be fou nd in t he
sectio n 6 .3.5 ‘Pl ayin g th e Edit in the Recor der Are a’, o n pa ge 7 7.
The othe r butt ons an d fi elds, sp ecif ic to t he Voic e Over tab , are des crib e d in the
next sect ions .
11.1.2 VOICEOVER PROCESS
P ROCESS O VERVIEW
The vo iceo ver reco rdin g proces s in clud es f our ste ps:
1. Defini ng t he A rea to R ec ord t he Vo iceo ver (see p age 19 0)
2. Record ing the Voic eover (see p age 191)
3. Checki ng t he R ecord ed V oiceov er ( see page 192 )
4. Attenu ati ng o ther Trac ks when Us ing Voic eove r (s ee pag e 1 92)
D EFINING THE A REA TO R ECORD THE V OICEOVER
Mark In
or
or
Place t he now line in th e timeli ne whe re th e voi ce over sh ould s tar t, th en c lick th e
Mark IN bu tton i n the t imelin e or rec orde r area to defin e the IN p oint of th e
record ing area for the voi ceover .
The timec ode of th e mar k IN point wil l be disp lay ed in the rec order p anel next to
the IN bu tton .
Mark Out
or
or
Place th e nowl ine in t he timelin e where the voi c eover sh ould e nd, th en click th e
Mark OUT butt on i n the timeli ne or reco rder area to def ine t he OUT poi nt of the
record ing area for the voi ceover .
190
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
The time code o f the mar k OUT point wi ll be di spla yed in the r ecor der pa nel next to
the OUT but ton. Th e dur ation of t he voi ceove r wi ll also be sh own on th e recorde r
area.
Note:
It is p ossi ble t o sta rt a voiceo ver r ecor ding w it hout a ddin g an OU T
point . In thi s case , the voiceo ver re cord ing wou ld cont inue un til yo u
stop m anua lly the reco rdi ng cl icki ng t he Re cord in g but ton.
R ECORDING THE V OICEOVER
Launch the rec ordi ng p ro cess b y pr essi ng t he R ec butt on.
…1 (co unt down)
When the us er sele cts th e Rec butto n when mar k IN and mark OUT ha ve b een set,
a countd own st arts a nd i s shown on t he but ton it self. I t indi cate s the nu mber o f
second s be fore the IN p oint of t he v oice over an d all ows t o us er t o ge t r eady f or
the reco rdin g. Dur ing th e countd own Cle anEdi t wil l play th e edit l eadi ng up to the
IN poi nt for the voic eover .
Note:
The Pre roll valu e for a v oiceov er ca n be s et in X edio Ma nage r. Pl ease
refer to the Xedi o Man ag er use r ma nual for fur the r det ails .
When t he c ount down is o ver, the R ec b utt on d ispl ays a red but ton
.
The edit i s play ed and k eeps rec ordi ng unt il the OUT point i s reac hed or until t he
user p ress es t he R ec b ut ton a gain to stop rec ordi ng.
The trac k where t he voi c eover cl ip wil l be pla ced is the fir st ste reo tr ack that is
select ed look ing fro m th e bottom of the t imeli ne . A dialog box wil l open to ask
which trac k t o pl ace th e rec orded vo iceov er o n if this wou ld overw rit e some
elemen ts a lrea dy p rese nt on t he t imel ine.
Only t he s tere o t racks ca n be sele cted .
191
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
C HECKING THE R ECORDED V OICEOVER
Go to Voiceover Mark IN
Clicki ng t he Go to M ark IN but ton moves the cur r ent po sit ion o f no wlin e to the IN
point corr espo ndin g to th e beg inni ng o f th e la st v o iceove r re cord ing.
This bu tto n whe n comb i ned wi th th e CTRL key from t he ke yboa rd, m o ves th e
nowlin e to the som e se conds (Pre roll val ue) b efore the beg inni ng o f the l ast
record ing, and dir ectl y l a unches a p layb ack to e na ble t he r ecord ing to be c hecked .
Go to Voiceover Mark OUT
Clicki ng the Go to Mark OUT butto n moves the c urrent po sit ion of now lin e to the
OUT po int corre spon ding to th e be ginn ing of the la st vo iceov er r ecor ding .
This bu tto n whe n comb i ned wi th th e CTRL key from t he ke yboa rd, m o ves th e
nowlin e to some sec onds (Preroll v alue ) befor e th e end of the las t recor di ng and
launch es a pl aybac k to e nable the voi ceov er OUT point to be c heck ed.
A TTENUATING OTHER T RACKS WHEN U SING V OICEOVER
Using a r ight c lick o n a voiceo ver tr ack br ings u p a
contex tua l menu off er ing the cho ice to add
atten uati on to a ny aud io elemen ts tha t are v erti c ally
adjace nt to th e reco rd ed voice over s ecti on. This
means that the audi o tr a cks wi ll f ade t o a lower l evel
for t he d urat ion of t he v oi ceover .
When a tten uati on is p re sent, the voi ceov er e le ment
color cha nges to a da rke r shade to ind icat e that the
atten uati on i s sw itch ed o n.
Note
The leve l of atte nuat ion and other se ttin gs suc h as fade in an d out
values are s et i n the Softwa re > P arame ter Profil es ar ea o f Xedi o
Manage r. P leas e re fer to the r elat ed u ser m anua l f or mor e de tail s.
192
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
11.2 ADDING A LOGO OR GRAPHIC
11.2.1 INTRODUCTION
You wil l use tags to ad d a logo o r sti ll gr aphi c. T ags are refe renc e poi nts marked
on the tim ecode bar to t rigger an even t, su ch a s the i nser t of a gr aphi c or log o.
Tags a re c reat ed a nd m a naged via the Tag Mana g er win dow.
11.2.2 ACCESSING THE TAG MANAGER WINDOW
To acc ess the Tag M anag er win dow, you can :
•
right- clic k on t he Tim ec ode bar in th e time line displa y and sele ct Add Tag
from t he c onte xtua l me nu :
•
press th e keybo ard sho r tcut
. In this case , the t ag posit ion is de fine d
based on t he Mark IN a nd Mark OUT po ints , or nowline po sit ion. Fo r more
inform atio n, ref er to th e descrip tion o f the TC i n and TC Dur fie lds in the
sectio n 1 1.2. 4 ‘F ield s in t he Tag Man ager Wind ow’ , on page 195 .
193
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
11.2.3 POSSIBLE ACTIONS IN THE TAG MANAGER WINDOW
The Ta g Man ager win dow allow s th e us er to p erfor m vari ous acti ons:
194
Action
Refer to th e se ctio n …
Inser ting a l ogo or s till gr aphic from a TC IN to a T C
OUT (IN and OUT poin ts of th e ta g), with a f ade in
and f ade out.
11.2. 5 ’Ho w to Ins ert a
Logo o r Gr aphi c us ing
Tags’, on page 196
Changi ng t he t ag p osi tion on t he t imel ine.
11.2. 6 ’Mo ving Tag
Points ’, on p age 197
Changi ng t he t ag o rder w hen se vera l ta gs a re
defin ed.
11.2. 4 ‘F ield s in the Tag
Manage r Win dow’ , on pa ge
195 – Tag Orde r gr oup b ox
Deleti ng a ta g.
11.2. 7 ’Ho w to Del ete
Tags’, on page 198
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
11.2.4 FIELDS IN THE TAG MANAGER WINDOW
The fo llow ing tabl e de s cribes in deta ils the var ious fiel ds i n th e Tag Manage r
window :
Field/ Butto n
Descri ption
Propert ies group box
TC In
Spin bo x to type the t ag IN poin t, i n oth er wor ds t he time code
from whe n the g raph ic will be d ispl ayed (on th e top of the
video) .
When you use t he con te xtual m enu t o call the T ag Mana ger
window , t he valu e f or t he t ag IN p oint co rres p onds to the
posit ion of the mo use o n the Tim ecod e bar wh e n you ri ghtclick on the m ouse .
When you us e the key b oard sho rtcu t
to call th e Tag
Manage r wind ow, t he ta g IN poin t an d dur atio n va lues wi ll be
retrie ved from the tim eli ne Mar k IN and Mar k O UT poi nts if
they ar e def ined . Oth erwi se, the nowl ine po sit ion will be used
as th e ta g IN poi nt w ith t he de faul t du rati on o f 4 s econds .
TC Dur chec k bo x
Check box t o speci fy whe ther you wa nt to def ine h ow long the
graphi c sh ould be disp lay ed:
• If it is no t tic ked, the gra phic wi ll be dis play ed un t il the end
of th e ed it.
• If it is ti cked , you can s pecify how l ong the g rap hic sh ould
be dis playe d in the TC D ur fie ld. B y def ault , the d urati on is
4 seco nds.
TC Dur (fie ld)
Spin box to type how lo n g the gr aphi c wi ll be d is played fr om
the t ag I N po int.
Logo In sert ion T ab
Label
Drop-d own b ox to s elec t t he fi le c onta ini ng t he g ra phic or l ogo
to be ins erte d. T he T IFF or TA G fi les alre ady inc luded in the
projec t wi ll b e d ispl ayed i n drop -dow n li st.
If the re ques ted fi le is n o t avail able i n the dr op-d o wn list , you
first nee d to imp ort it, usi ng th e Imp ort butt on.
Import
Button t hat op ens the KM Importer d ialo g box, fr o m where you
can br owse to and impor t the requ este d gr aphi c fi l e.
Fades
Check b ox to spec ify w h ether you wa nt t he gr aph ic to a ppea r
and d isapp ear usin g a fa de ef fect :
• If it is no t ticke d, the g ra phic wil l be ful ly disp laye d and will
disapp ear in c ut m ode.
• If it is tic ked, yo u ca n specif y b elow the dur ati on of th e
fade in a nd f ade out for t he gra phic dis play .
195
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Field/ Butto n
Descri ption
In: X fram es
Field to s peci fy the d ura tion, i n frame s, of t he fa de in eff ect
when t he g raph ic w ill app ear on th e cl ip.
Out: X fr ames
Field t o spe cify the d urat ion, i n fram es, o f the fad e out e ffec t
when t he g raph ic w ill dis appear .
Link
Check box to s ynch roni ze the fade in and fade ou t durat ions .
Tag Ord er g roup box
Tag Li st ( 00, 01,
02, …)
List of t he tags def ined i n the tim elin e. Y ou c an s elect one or
more t ags at a tim e.
Up
Button to move the se lect ed ta g hi gher in the tag li st.
Down
Button to move the se lect ed ta g low er i n t he t ag l is t.
Prev
Button to sel ect the prev i ous t ag i n th e ta g l ist.
Next
Button to sel ect the next tag i n th e ta g l ist.
Delete
Button to del ete the sele cted tag( s).
11.2.5 HOW TO INSERT A LOGO OR GRAPHIC USING TAGS
Note
The logo o r grap hic to b e inserte d are us uall y TIF F or TGA fil e with a ke y
layer. T he fi le is ei ther alread y pres ent in the c urrent p roje ct or ca n be
import ed a s yo u de fine th e tag for the gra phic ins e rtion .
For a ddit iona l i nfor mati o n on the va riou s f ield s r eferre d t o i n t he pr oc ed ure, see
the s ecti on 1 1.2. 4 ‘F ield s in t he T ag Ma nage r Win dow’, on p age 195.
To ins ert a gr aphi c or log o by defi ning a t ag, proc e ed as fol lows:
1. Right- clic k on t he Ti mec ode bar at t he po siti on w here yo u wan t the grap hi c to
be in sert ed, and sele ct A dd tag to open the Tag M anager win dow.
2. If ne cessa ry, modi fy t he timec ode where th e gr aphic shou ld b e i nsert e d by
typin g th e re ques ted time code in t he TC In fie ld.
3. If you want to spe cify ho w long the grap hic sho ul d be display ed, ti ck the c heck
box in fron t of the TC Du r fiel d an d spe cify the du ratio n for the grap hic d is play
in th e TC Dur fiel d.
Otherw ise, the gra phic wi ll be dis play ed u ntil the e nd of the edi t.
4. If t he g raph ic is a lrea dy presen t i n t he p roje ct, se lect the fil e d irec tly from the
Label drop -down fi eld.
196
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
If th e gr aphi c is not ava il able in t he p roje ct, clic k t he Imp ort butt on t o be a ble
to se lect and impo rt it v ia the KM Im port er d ialo g b ox.
5. If you wa nt the graph ic t o appea r and di sapp ear i n a fade i n and fa de ou t, tick
the F ades chec k bo x, a nd sp ecif y th e du rati on (frame s) f or t he fade in and
fade out effe ct.
Otherw ise, the gra phic wi ll ap pear and dis appe ar i n cut mode .
6. Click OK.
When s ucces sful ly added , the tag wil l sh ow o n th e timec ode bar with a n um ber.
11.2.6 MOVING TAG POINTS
P OSSIBLE M ETHODS
You ca n mo ve o ne o r mor e tag s in one of the fol lo wing w ays:
•
by sel ecti ng t he t ag p oi nts on the Time code bar and d ragg ing the m ous e to
move t he s elec ted tag po ints.
This meth od is less pr eci se, but all ows you to mo ve severa l tags at th e sa me
time.
•
by edit ing d irec tly th e p ositi on and the du rati on of a tag in the T ag Man ager
window .
This m etho d is more pre c ise, but only all ows you t o move one tag at a t ime.
197
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
H OW TO M OVE THE T AG P OINTS IN THE T IMELINE D ISPLAY
To mov e th e ta gs p oint s direct ly in t he t imel ine di splay, pro ceed as fol lows :
1. Select t he tag p oint (s) y ou want to mo ve by cl ick ing on the tag mar ker on the
Timeco de b ar.
To sel ect seve ral tag poi nts, keep the CTRL key p ressed whi le c lick ing on t he
tag ma rker s. T o de sele ct a tag poi nt, clic k ag ain o n the tag mark er.
The ma rkers of the sel ect ed ta gs b ecome pur ple:
2. Positi on t he mo use o ver the se lect ed t ags, drag the se lect ed t ag po int( s ) to
the r eques ted pos itio n an d rel ease it/ them .
During the dra g ac tion , a rectan gula r sh adow on th e Time code bar show s th e
new po siti on o f t he s elec t ed ta g whi ch i s t he mo st on th e le ft i n t he t imel ine :
H OW TO M OVE THE T AG P OINTS IN THE T AG M ANAGER
W INDOW
To mov e th e ta gs p oint s i n the Tag Mana ger w indo w, pro ceed as foll ows:
1. Right- clic k on th e Timec o de bar an d sele ct Tag P r operti es fro m the co ntex tual
menu. The Tag M anag er window open s.
2. In th e Ta g Ord er g roup b ox, c lick the numb er o f t h e tag you want to move .
3. In the Prop erti es gro up box, mod ify the v alue s of the TC In and /or TC Dur
field s de pend ing on t he r equest ed m ove.
4. Click OK.
11.2.7 HOW TO DELETE TAGS
To del ete a t ag, proc eed as fo llows
1. Right- clic k on th e Timec o de bar an d sele ct Tag P r operti es fro m the co ntex tual
menu. The Tag M anag er window open s.
2. In th e Ta g Ord er g roup b ox, c lick the numb er o f t h e tag you want to del ete.
3. Click Dele te.
4. Click OK.
No warn ing messa ge w ill be di spla yed to c onfi rm the dele te a ctio n, b ut y ou wil l
still hav e th e po ssib ilit y t o undo th e ac tion usi ng t he key boar d sh ortc ut
+
198
.
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
11.3 ADDING INTEGRATED TEXT AND
GRAPHICS
11.3.1 INTRODUCTION
The Ch arac ter G ener ator tool all ows to p lace tex t anyw here on the vide o image
and t o c ombi ne it w ith a graphi cs laye r. The comb inati on of text an d gr aphi cs ca n
be save d as te mpla te wh ich can then b e re- used l ater. T his t ool is avai labl e fro m
the Te xt tab of C leanE dit .
11.3.2 TEXT TAB OVERVIEW
The Text ta b conta ins t hree main ar eas. Th ey are high ligh ted on th e followi ng
screen shot and sho rtly d escrib ed i n t he t able bel o w:
199
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Area
1.
Descri ption
Charact er
Genera tor
area
This p ane is m ade up o f t wo sub -tab s:
• the Pa ge List tab
• the Te xt P rope rtie s ta b
2.
Player Pan e
This pane co ntai ns a udio
integ rate d te xt a nd g raph ics.
3.
Graphi cal
Timeli ne
This a rea cont ains the ed it to whi ch t ext is a dded ..
mete rs
and
sho ws
the
11.3.3 CHARACTER GENERATOR PROCESS
The te xt and graph ics int egrat ion proce ss i nclu des the foll owin g st eps:
1. Defini ng t he A rea to Inse rt Tex t/Gr aphi cs ( see pag e 200)
2. Adding Tex t an d Gr aphi c s to the Edit (se e pa ge 2 01)
3. Saving a templ ate of C ha racter Gen erat or P age (s ee pag e 2 07)
4. Applyi ng a Tra nsit ion Eff ect t o th e CG Area (se e p age 20 9)
5. Checki ng t he I nteg rate d Text a nd G raph ics (see p age 20 9)
6. Editi ng t he Ch arac ter Ge nerato r Pa ge P rope rtie s ( see pa ge 2 10)
11.3.4 DEFINING THE AREA TO INSERT TEXT/GRAPHICS
When a n e dit is loa ded in th e t imel ine, yo u wi ll first hav e t o d efin e t he area t o
insert te xt/g raph ics. Thi s can be vi ewed like cre ati ng a C hara cter Gen erat or page .
You ha ve t he possi bil ity t o:
•
Define th e ar ea f rom the nowli ne posi tion for a d efaul t du rati on o f 4 sec o nds:
put the no wlin e at the r e quired p osit ion an d then press th e Creat e New P age
butto n.
•
Define t he area b etwee n a Mark IN and a Mark OUT: clic k the Mark I N and
Mark OUT but tons an d t hen the Cre ate New Pa ge butto n on the to p of the
Page L ist tab .
The Te xt P rope rtie s ta b i s disp laye d.
Tags a ppea r in the tim eli ne.
They are as soci ated t o t ag number s which a re di splaye d in the Pa ge Lis t tab as
well.
200
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Note
Nested are as c an b e de fi ned.
or
11.3.5 ADDING TEXT AND GRAPHICS TO THE EDIT
As soo n as the C reat e New Pag e but ton has be en sel ecte d, t he Te xt Pr opert ies
tab is di spla yed a llowi n g you to a dd tex t, ad d a pictur e, sa ve a Ch aracte r
Genera tor temp late .
You ha ve t he possi bil ity t o:
•
Use a pre -def ined tex t & graph ics t empla te fr o m the Bas e Temp late f ield.
Refer to s ecti on ‘Appl yin g a t empla te’ on page 20 7.
•
Define new tex t an d gr ap hics a s ex pla ined bel ow.
201
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
A DDING T EXT A REA AND D EFINING T EXT P ROPERTIES
How to Add Text
To ent er text , pr oceed as foll ows:
1. Click the
bu tton from the Text Prop erti es t ab.
A tex t bo x ap pears in the Video Dis play :
2. Enter your tex t i n th e te xt box.
3. Define the te xt p roper tie s thro ugh the five sub -tab s of the Text Prop ert ies t ab.
4. Click the
bu tton to vali d ate y our text .
Note
You ca n re peat ste ps 1 t o 4 t o ass ocia te s ever al text areas to the same
tag a rea. The y wi ll then be di spla yed next to th e same t ag numbe r i n th e
tag l ist.
Possible Actions on the Text Area
You ca n mov e or resi ze t he tex t ar ea b y dra ggin g the ar ea t o th e de sired p ositi on
and dr aggi ng the edges t o incr ease the box si ze.
The fo llow ing icon s ar e p resent on the tex t ar ea:
Button
Descri ption
Delete s th e t ext area .
Valida tes th e text and its proper ties . The t ext area is th en
surrou nded by a th in blac k lin e to ide ntif y i t.
Cancel s th e ed itin g pe rfo rmed s ince the las t Va lid ate a ctio n.
202
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
How to Define Text Properties
Five s ub-t abs are avai lab le in the Tex t Pr oper ties t ab to def ine the tex t pro p erties .
If no tex t i s se lect ed, c hangin g p roper ties wil l be ap plie d to al l th e t ex t in the
area.
If som e t ext is s elec ted, changi ng p rope rtie s wi ll be app lie d to the sel ecti o n onl y.
Text Sub-tab
The T ext sub -tab pro vid es op tion s w hich de fine the prope rtie s o f the tex t it self ,
such a s st yle , al ignme nt, font, col or, size and opa c ity.
The anti alia sing op tion is selec ted by de faul t. This is use d to minim i ze the
distor tio n ar tifa cts.
Exampl e wit h i tali c, c ente red an d t urquo ise opt ions :
Edge Sub-tab
The Ed ge s ub-t ab i s us ed when you want to add a border to the tex t.
Exampl e wit h a blu e ed ge of s ize 1 an d 10 0% opac ity:
203
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Shadow Sub-tab
The Sh adow sub- tab is u sed wh en y ou wa nt to a p ply a sha dow t o t he t ext.
To app ly a sha dow to t he text , de fine the fo llowi ng sett ings :
•
Select th e Set a S hadow opti on.
•
Choose a c olor f or the s h adow by cl icki ng the Co lo r box, sel ect ing a co lor fr om
the p alet te a nd t hen pres sing the OK bu tton .
•
The Of fset X pa rame ter d efine s th e ho rizo ntal siz e of t he s hadow .
•
The Of fset Y pa rame ter d efine s th e ve rtic al s ize of the shad ow.
Exampl e of a w hite sha do w with Off sets of 5:
Spacing Sub-tab
The Spac ing s ub-t ab de fines t he sp acing betw e en line s (In terl ine op tio n) and
betwee n le tter s (T rack ing ).
204
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
Exampl e wit h a n in terl ine of 1 .5 a nd a tra ckin g of 15:
Background Sub-tab
The Ba ckgr ound sub- tab i s used to app ly a col or b ackgro und in t he text are a:
Exampl e wit h a lig ht o ran ge bac kgro und with 50% opaci ty:
205
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
A DDING G RAPHICS
Provid ed t hat t he En ab le Impo rt Pi ctur e op tio n has b een enab led i n Xedio
Manage r (Softw are > Pa ramete r Profi les > Clea nEdit > Cg) , an Import Pictur e
butto n is dis play ed a t th e bott om o f th e Te xt Pr ope rties tab .
1. Press the
bu tton .
The KM Impo rter Dia log b ow ope ns:
2. Press the Brows e bu tto n to se lect the pic ture fi le ( .tif) to impo rt.
3. Associ ate a Me dia C lass to th e pi ctur e fr om t he M edia C lass fie ld
4. Press OK.
The pi ctur e is add ed to t he Vid eo D ispl ay:
Note t hat the pic ture can not b e mov ed o r re size d once impor ted.
206
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
11.3.6 WORKING WITH TEMPLATE OF TEXT AND GRAPHICS
Once text an d/or gr aphi c s have been add ed, yo u may want to sav e this la yout as
templa te fo r fur ther use. The Enab le Sa ve As T emplat e opt ion mu st ha ve been
enable d i n X edio Man age r (So ftwar e > Pa ramet er Profil es > Cl eanE dit > C g ). Th en
a Save As Templ ate butt on is dis play ed a t th e bo t tom of th e Tex t Pr oper tie s tab .
S AVING A TEMPLATE OF C HARACTER G ENERATOR P AGE
To sav e a temp late :
1. Press the
bu tton
The Sa ve A s Tem plat e di alog box opens
2. Enter a Nam e i n th e Lab el fi eld.
3. Associ ate a Cl ass to t he templa te from the Clas s f ield.
4. If re quir ed, assi gn Me tad ata f rom t he M etada ta b u tton.
5. Press the Save & Pu blis h but ton.
The templ ate nam e is av ailab le from th e Base Te mplate l ist in th e Text Pr opert ies
tab.
Templa tes ar e stor ed in the dat abas e and are list ed in the Me dia Ma nage r , under
the CG tem plat e ca tego ry .
A PPLYING A TEMPLATE
When you wa nt to ap p ly a saved t ext & gr a phics te mpla te to a C haract er
Genera tor page bei ng c re ated, do one of t he foll ow ing:
•
select it from th e Bas e T emplat e li st in t he T ext P ropert ies tab
•
select it in the M edia Ma nager and drag it onto t he Med ia P ane b in a nd t hen
drag it o nto the Text pro p erties ta b:
207
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Text a nd g raph ics are the n aut omati call y ap plie d t o the pag e.
208
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
11.3.7 APPLYING A TRANSITION EFFECT TO THE CG AREA
During p layo ut, th e tex t and grap hics c an ap pear and /or di sapp ear withou t
transi tio n or with a F ade transi tio n ef fect . Th is i s defin ed f rom t he P age Li st ta b.
To def ine t he e ffec t fo r t he IN p oint of t he CG ar ea, se lect it i n th e In eff ect fi eld
from t he P rope rtie s gr oup box.
To defi ne t he ef fect for t he OUT po int of th e CG area, s elec t it in th e Out effect
field from th e Pro pert ies group box.
With a Fa de effe ct, you will have to se t i ts d urat i on in th e c orre spond ing Duratio n
field .
11.3.8 CHECKING THE INTEGRATED TEXT AND GRAPHICS
You ca n ch eck the resu lt of t he text and gra phic s inte grat ion by p layi ng t he ed it
from t he P laye r ar ea.
To pla ce t he n owli ne o n a spec ific ta g, s elec t it i n the tag lis t fr om t he P age Li st
tab a nd s elec t t he J ump to in or the Jump to o ut radi o bu tton . Th is w ill pl ace t he
nowlin e on the fi rst frame or o n th e la st f rame of th e tag are a.
When a fad e ef fect is d efine d, s elec ting the Ou tside tran siti on FX opt i on wil l
place the n owli ne wi thin t he tag area , on the firs t f rame af ter the I n ef fect (j ump to
in) or be fore the Out eff e ct (j ump t o ou t).
Exampl e:
Jump t o Ou t wi thou t th e Outsid e tra nsit ion FX o ption :
Jump t o Ou t wi th t he O ut side t rans ition FX opti o n:
209
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
11.3.9 EDITING THE CHARACTER GENERATOR PAGE PROPERTIES
E DITING A REA D URATION
How to Edit a Tag Area Duration
1. Select th e ta g in the tag l ist f rom the P age Lis t ta b
2. Modify the dur atio n i n th e Durat ion f iel d fr om th e Proper ties gro up b ox
3. Press ENTER.
How to Remove the Mark OUT of a Tag
1. Select th e ta g in the tag l ist f rom the P age Lis t ta b
2. Select th e No Out o pti on
The co rres pond ing text a nd gra phic s wi ll t hen be appli ed u ntil the end of t he ed it.
E DITING P AGE P ROPERTIES
How to Edit the Properties of the Text Area
1. Double -cli ck t he s elec ted tag in t he t ag list from th e Page Lis t t ab
The Te xt P rope rtie s ta b o pens. Text are a(s) rel ate d to the curr ent tag are
surrou nded wit h a thin bl ack l ine.
2. Double -cli ck i n th e te xt a rea.
3. Modify the req uire d pr op erties .
4. Press the
210
bu tton .
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
How to Modify the Selected Picture
•
browse for a n ew p ictu re from t he I mpor t Pi ctur e b utton OR
•
select None fr om th e Ba c kground Pic ture fie ld t o un-ass ign pict ure.
P OSSIBLE A CTIONS FROM THE P AGE L IST T AB
When you r igh t-cl ick a t a g line i n the T ag Lis t fro m the Pag e List tab, the f ollowi ng
contex tua l men u is dis pla yed:
Menu It em
Meaning
Enable
Enable s t he s elec ted ta g if it has pre viou sly b een d isab led. A
is d ispl ayed nex t to the t ag num ber in t he tag list .
Disabl e
Disabl es the sele cted ta g are a, so i t w ill not be displa yed dur ing
edit p layo ut. A
tag l ist.
is disp l ayed n ext to th e ta g nu mber in the
Duplic ate
Duplic ates t he sel ecte d t ag area an d plac es the n ew tag are a just
after the sel ecte d on e.
Delete
Delete s th e se lect ed tag area.
211
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
12. Header Maker
12.1 INTRODUCTION
The Head er Mak er ta b p rovide s a to ol to i nser t a still c lip a t the begi nnin g of an
edit. Th is stil l is creat ed automati call y and is ba sed on info rmati on defi n ed in a
XML fi le. B esid es t his prede fine d in forma tio n , you can also ente r custo m
inform atio n (l ike feed , l oc ation , so urce , au dio) in t he Dat a ed iti ng ar ea.
A specif ic (ed itab le) pr o file de scrib es the w ay i n which th e stil l clip h a s to be
genera ted (com ponen ts a nd pos iti ons) as w ell as it s len gth in t he t imel ine.
The Head er Ma ker to ol suppor ts 4: 3 and 16:9 e dits an d tak es ca re of t he vide o
aspect ra tio.
12.2 HEADER MAKER TAB OVERVIEW
The Heade r Maker t ab conta ins thr ee main a re as. They ar e high ligh ted on the
follow ing scre ensh ot a nd shortl y de scri bed in the t able below :
212
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Area
Descri ption
1.
Header
Previe w Ar ea
2.
Recorde r Ar ea
3.
Timeli ne Ar ea
This p ane also con tain s a data edi ting are a.
This a rea cont ains the ed it to whi ch a sti ll i s ad de d..
The Re corde r ar ea a nd th e Time line are a ar e sim il ar to the one s on the Edi t tab.
12.3 OPERATIONS
To manua lly en ter d ata i n the ded icat ed fi elds i n the Dat a Edit ing ar ea, s e lect th e
field and type the valu e or sel ect a val ue f rom t h e drop -down lis t. I f yo u want t o
remove the val ues from t hese fiel ds, clic k on the Clear butt on.
By clic king on th e Cre at e butt on yo u crea te t he still clip at th e beg inni n g of th e
edit.
On thi s st ill clip you can perfo rm a coup le o f op e ratio ns, a s yo u wou ld d o on an y
other cli p in the tim elin e, such as:
•
Enlarg ing the cli p,
•
Reduci ng t he c lip,
•
Moving the cli p,
•
Deleti ng t he c lip ,
•
Applyi ng v ideo cli p e ffec t s,
•
Adding vid eo trans iti ons betwee n th e st ill cli p an d an a djac ent one.
213
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
13. Final Stages in the
Editing Process
13.1 CHECKING THE EDIT
When th e ed it i s com ple ted i t is poss ible to
check it. X edio Clea nEdi t pars es th e ti meli ne
for pos sibl e err ors ( l ack of vide o, fo r
exampl e).
If a hole is dis cover ed a dialo g box open s and
gives a t ime r efer ence on t he t imeli ne f or
where ther e is no vide o.
If a fas t moti on cl ip is d etect ed a di alog b ox
opens via whi ch y ou c an re nder the fa st
motion cli p(s) .
If yo u ch oose No:
• The Check bu tton rem ai ns enable d, sin ce
not-re nder ed fas t motio n clips are s till
presen t i n th e ed it.
• The R2B (re ady
remain s di sabl ed.
to
broadc ast)
b utto n
If th e ed it is c heck ed s uc cessfu lly , th e Che ck b utt on wil l b e di sabl ed a nd t he R2B
(ready to broa dcas t) b utt on wil l be ena bled .
Refer to s ecti on 2 .9 ‘Che cking the Edi t’ o n pa ge 1 6 for more inf orma tion .
214
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
13.2 PLAYING OUT AN EDIT
13.2.1 INTRODUCTION
You ca n pl ay o ut an e dit from t wo d iffe rent ‘lo cat io ns’:
•
from t he X edio Cle anEd it appl icat ion, via the Pla y out t ab.
You u se s uch a solu tion when you want to pl ayou t some edi ts (or a c lip or edit)
indiv idua lly.
This s ecti on w ill cove r th e pla yout from Pla yout ta b.
•
from t he X edio Pla yout O rganiz er.
You use su ch a sol utio n when you wa nt to m anage se vera l edit s in your
playou t, and/ or wh en a d edica ted play out serve r i s ins tall ed o n yo ur s etup .
This s ecti on i s co vere d in the Play out Organ izer us er man ual.
You can o bvio usly n ot u se both p layo ut sol uti on s at the s ame tim e on t he same
machin e.
Note
The pla yout opti on is a v ailab le onl y on wo rkst ati ons equ ippe d with an
EVS SDI ou tput boa rd (P CX2 or PCX3 ).
13.2.2 PLAYOUT PROCESS FROM THE PLAYOUT TAB
1.
Activa ting the Play out t ab:
Move t he m ouse poi nter over the P layo ut tab
2.
Preloa ding the edit :
You ca n pl ay a n ed it w he ther it i s re ady to b road c ast o r no t.
To pre load th e ed it f or t he pl ayou t, s elec t t he e d it fr om t he E dit zone in t he
Projec ts a rea and drag it anywhe re o nto the Play o ut ta b wor k ar ea.
The ed it is r eady to be p l ayed o ut.
215
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
3.
Playin g th e ed it:
To play the edi t, you ca n direct ly use the usu al contro l comman ds avai la ble
on th e ri ght part of the wi ndow.
For mo re info rmat ion on t he Pl ayou t t ab, ref er to s ectio n 13 .2. 3 ‘P layo ut Ta b’
216.
13.2.3 PLAYOUT TAB
O VERVIEW
The Pl ayou t ta b con tain s three mai n are as. They are hi ghli ghte d on the fo llowin g
screen shot :
Area Nu mber
Area Na me
1.
Informa tion Zone
2.
Control Zone
3.
Media B ar
I NFORMATION Z ONE
The in forma tion zone dis plays gener al d etai ls o f t he edi t (li ke t ype, labe l, system ,
durat ion, dat e).
The text fi eld bel ow this genera l info rmati on show s a log confir ming whe n t he edit
was lo aded cor rect ly a nd is rea dy for play out.
216
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
C ONTROL Z ONE
The bu tton s i n th e co ntro l zon e al low y ou to:
Go to the beg inni ng o f th e edi t
Preloa d th e ed it
Play the edit
Stop the edit
Go to the pre vious fr ame
Go to the nex t fr ame
The fo llow ing func tion s a re ava ilab le:
Item
Descri ption
Goto Ti mecod e
Enteri ng a time code v alu e in this fi eld al lows to j ump to
this spec ific tim ecode .
Start Timec ode
Enteri ng a ti mecod e val u e in this fiel d allo ws the edit to
be pl ayed out from th is s pecif ic t imeco de.
Enable Pla y Shu ttle
When this op tion is sel ected , t he P lay fun ctio n can be
activa ted from the Shu ttl e Pro.
Stop Wa rning
If thi s opt ion is sele cted when you press Play a nd then
Stop, a wa rnin g me ssage is d ispl ayed :
M EDIA B AR
The vi deo will be visi ble on th e SDI out put of Xedi o Clea nEdi t.
The Me dia Bar disp lays t he fo llowi ng info rmati on:
•
a progr ess indic ator (bl ue ver tica l lin e), w hich shows t he c urren t pl a yout
posit ion.
•
On the lef t, t he t ime e la psed f rom t he b egin ning of the edi t up to t he c urr ent
217
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
playou t p osit ion.
•
On the ri ght, the dur atio n from the curr ent posi tion unti l th e en d of th e pl ay out.
13.3 EXPORTING AN EDIT OR A MEDIA
13.3.1 INTRODUCTION
This se ctio n pre sent s ho w you can expo rt an edit or a med ia to a fil e fro m Xedio
CleanE dit, sel ecti ng:
•
a form at f rom a li st o f s u pporte d co decs
•
a des tina tion .
This c an b e do ne e ven if the o rigi nal edit was in a mix of man y di ffer ent fil e types .
Xedio Cle anEd it makes it possibl e to expo rt the fina l edit /medi a to several
desti nati ons:
•
to Cle anEd it.
This allo ws y ou to cons ol idate an edi t/me dia and s tore it as a s ingl e c lip in the
Xedio stor age syst em a n d Xedi o da tab ase.
•
to Fi le
This allow s y ou to e xp ort a n e dit/ medi a to a file tha t ca n b e re ad b y an
extern al s yste m.
•
to Dev ice
This all ows you t o expo r t an edit /medi a to an ex t ernal de vice , eith er a vi deo
tape recor der, or to an E VS ser ver.
•
to Tar get
This all ows you t o exp ort an edi t/med ia and perfor m a prede fine d set of
operat ions for spe cif ic w orkflo ws.
218
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
13.3.2 LOADING AN EDIT OR A MEDIA ON THE EXPORT TAB
1.
Activa ting the Expor t ta b:
Move t he m ouse poi nter over the E xpor t ta b.
2.
Select ing the edit/ medi a :
To disp lay the e dit info r mation , se lect the e dit f rom the Edi t zon e, or t he
media fr om the Me dia zo ne, in th e Proj ects a rea and drag it anyw here o n to
the Ex port ta b wor k ar ea.
3.
Select ing the expor t de stinat ion:
Select th e ta b c orres po nding to the des tina tio n you wan t to exp ort t he
render ed ed it o r the medi a to. Y ou wi ll th en ha ve t o ente r par amete rs sp eci fic
to ea ch t ab.
For de tail ed info rmati on, refer to the 13.3 .3 ‘ Expo r t Tab ’ on pag e 22 0.
219
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
13.3.3 EXPORT TAB
O VERVIEW
The Expor t tab con tains three mai n areas . They are high ligh ted on the f o llowin g
screen shot :
Area Nu mber
Area Na me
1.
Informa tion Zone
2.
Destin ation Zone
3.
Export Info rmati on Zo n e
I NFORMATION Z ONE
The inf ormat ion z one di s plays g enera l det ails on the edi t/me dia (l ike t ype, label,
creati on date , TC IN, dur ation ).
220
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
D ESTINATION Z ONE
Exporting to CleanEdit
To co nsol idat e an ed it a nd st ore it as a si ngle c lip i n t he X edio st orag e system
and Xedio da taba se, co mplete th e foll owing fi el ds and click on t he Star t button .
The rende ring p roce ss al lows crea ting h i-re solu tio n files an d lo-re solu tion files , if
desire d, in o ne s tep.
Field
Descri ption
Label
Name yo u g ive to t he e xp orted edi t/med ia ( mand at ory)
Shootin g Dat e
Date you can ass ign t o giv e i ndic atio n o n w hen t he
edit/m edia has bee n re nd ered.
Class
Class ca tego rizi ng the e dit/me dia as defi ned in t he Class
Manage r.
Publis h
Allows oth er u sers to see the expo rted edi t/me dia.
Extern al Re f
Refere nce wh ich ca n hel p to iden tif y the ed it/m e dia suc h
as a barco de from a VTR tape.
Descri ption
Option al text to desc ribe the e dit/ media .
Low-res tra nscod ing
codec
Low-re s fi le t ype for the f inal expor ted edi t/med ia.
Hi-res tra nscod ing
codec
Additio nal
Paramet ers
See th e cor respo ndin g Releas e Not es do cumen t for th e
compre hens ive li st of s upport ed re nder ing co d ecs and
format s.
Hi-res fil e ty pe for the fin al ex port ed e dit/m edia .
This w indo w c an b e r eac hed b y p ress ing the
the Tr ansc odin g Co dec z one.
butt on in
221
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Field
Descri ption
This a llows you speci fy parame ters for t he n ew f ile, s uch
as cl ip n ame, keyw ords, UmID or Var ID.
Press the Conf ig b utto n
to o pen the Con fig wind ow whe re y ou c an s peci f y
the h i-res and low -res me dia s erver s to sen d t he e dit t o:
Exporting to a File
To exp ort an edit /medi a t o a f ile tha t ca n be rea d by an ext erna l sy stem, c omplet e
the f ollow ing fie lds and cl ick on th e Sta rt b utt on.
222
Field
Descri ption
Label
Name yo u g ive to t he e xp orted edi t/med ia ( mand at ory).
Folder
Destin atio n fo lder whe re you wa nt t o ex port th e ed it/med ia to.
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
Field
Descri ption
Transco ding
Codec
Codec pro fil e, whic h wil l determ ine th e fina l fo rmat of th e
edit/m edia in the des tina t ion f olde r.
Additio nal
Paramet ers
This win dow ca n be re ac hed by pr essi ng th e
Transc odin g Cod ec z one.
butt on in th e
This allow s y ou spec ify parame ters for th e n ew f ile, such as
clip name, key words , Um I D or V arID .
Renderi ng f rom
Low-res
When sel ecte d, th e edi t i s rende red f rom th e low- r es file . Thi s
can sa ve s ome time .
Exporting to Device
To export a n edit/ medi a to an extern al devi ce, suc h as a XDCAM disk, a Sx S card ,
a P2 c ard or a n EV S se rv er,
•
select th e de vice typ e: X DCAM, S xS, P 2 or EVS X T
•
comple te t he f iel ds d escr ibed in t he t able bel ow
223
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
•
click on the Start bu tton .
Field
Descri ption
Common F ield s
Label
Name yo u g ive to t he e xp orted edi t/med ia ( mand at ory).
Transco ding Code c
Codec pr ofil e, whi ch wil l determ ine th e fin al form a t of the
edit/m edia in the des tina t ion f olde r.
The avail able co decs depend on t he type of device
select ed.
Additio nal
Paramet ers
This w indo w c an b e r eac hed b y p ress ing the
the Tr ansc odin g Co dec z one.
butt on in
This a llows you to s pec ify pa rame ters for the n ew fil e,
such a s cl ip name, key wo rds, Um ID o r Va rID.
To Dev ice E VS X T
XFile Gate way
Name o f th e h ardwa re de vice hos ting
applic ati on u sed to t rans f er th e ed it/me dia .
XT nr, Page , Ca m
XT numb er, page an d ca mera t o se nd t he e dit /me dia t o.
To Dev ice X DCAM, SxS or P2
Local Driv e
Locat ion w here the edi t/ media will be sent to.
Exporting to Target
224
th e
XFil e
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
Issue 4.1.B
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
The r ende ring to tar get tool all ows sele ctin g pr e defin ed s ets of ope rati o ns th at
occur in spec ifi c re nder i ng wo rkfl ows. Thes e o p erati ons are desc ribe d i n tar get
profi les (xml file s) l ist ed i n the Pro file dro p-dow n li st:
The op erat ions sup port ed by t he t ool are:
•
parall el rende ring in lo-r e solut ion and high -reso lut i on;
•
folde r se lect ion for the re ndered fi le d esti nati on;
•
file tr ansf ers t o up to two XT[2] vi deo se rv ers: hi gh-r esol utio n and loresolu tion or two high -res oluti on s erver s (m ain and backu p);
•
file dele tion af ter the tran sfer to t he X T[2 ] se rver s
•
xml fi le g ener atio n wi th metada ta c orre spon ding t o the ren dered fi le(s );
•
automa tic gene rati on o f t he Var ID 4.
Once a re nder ing t arge t profil e is se lect ed, t he Descrip tion area p rovi des an
overvi ew o f al l re nder ing tasks exec uted by the sel ected tar get prof ile.
Note
RTRProf Wiza rd c an b e u sed t o cr eate bas ic t arge t .
E XPORT I NFORMATION Z ONE
From th is z one, you can init iate the exp ort p roc ess. T he f ollo wing set tin gs are
availa ble :
Item
Descri ption
Start Timec ode
You c an s peci fy the edi t /media tim ecod e f rom w hich the
export pro cess wil l be gin.
In case of automatic generation of the VarID, the value automatically generated for the VarID is defined in Xedio
Manager: Xedio Manager > Software > Parameter Profiles > CleanEdit Settings, General tab: Automatic Edit ID
Generation: ‘IDDB’ for Database ID or ‘UUID’ for UmID.
4
225
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Item
Descri ption
Enable Vide o Vi ew
When se lect ed, a smal l v ideo v iew i s dis play ed du ring t he
export pro cess :
Config Butto n
Availa ble only in the To CleanE dit tab.
This o pens a Con fig w ind ow wher e you can spec if y the hi res an d l ow-re s med ia s e rvers to s end the edi t to :
When you pres s the S ta rt but ton, the ex port pro cess be gins and a p rogr ess bar
allow the user to moni tor the p rogre ss o f t he p roce ss.
At the end, a mes sage i nforms th e user th at the process has b een suc c essful ly
comple ted:
Note
‘71.4% play out r ate’ m ea ns that the e ncod ing pr o cess was 71,4% slow er
226
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
than rea l time ( 100% means real time , 200% mea ns 2 times f aste r than
real t ime) . 71 ,4% means that the e ncod ing proc es s of a 1 mi n ed it t akes
about 1 mi n 30 sec .
227
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Appendix 1 –
ShuttlePRO
Appendix 2 – Keyboard
Shortcuts
See ne xt p age .
228
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
Q WERTY - US K EYBOARD L AYOUT P ROFILE
229
Issue 4.1.B
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Appendix 3 – Digigram
Hardware Settings
S ETTINGS FOR A S TEREO B OARD
230
Xedio Suite Version 4.1 – User’s Manual – CleanEdit
EVS Broadcast Equipment – December 2011
Issue 4.1.B
S ETTINGS FOR A 5.1 B OARD
231
EVS Broadcast Equipment
Liège Science Park
16, rue Bois St Jean
B-4102 Ougrée
Belgium
Corporate
Headquarters
North & Latin America
Headquarters
Asia & Pacific
Headquarters
Other regional offices
available on
+32 4 361 7000
+1 973 575 7811
+852 2914 2501
www.evs.tv/contact
To learn more about EVS go to www.evs.tv